Home

Motorola 6802928J21 Cell Phone User Manual

1. sur 7 11 EF ASC A ind etna te tes ann eens art tee dsl niet 7 12 Output FORM 1 ices cece cise ele a A sabia seen rente A 7 13 RODIV 1Owcie AR ne a adie Act Run dd et en ae AE 7 13 Authentication Mode E mail 7 14 Login Guest ACCESS ici swe An tik lee AA etats 7 14 Login Network Authenticated Access AAA 7 15 Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access 7 16 Changing the Authentication Service 7 17 Logging Offiaiceeih aes lee ay ee ti bettas 7 18 Managing Scan Jobs iiciin ue aa raar eaa tee Se eects 7 19 e e 7 19 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page v Page vi o a ne nn sean ere E en 8 1 Print Driver Features nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna naa 8 2 Tower Mall bX x geed 8 5 Managing Print Jobs ss sssnssnneennnnennnnennnse 8 6 Null 8 6 Completed Print Jobs Oueue 8 9 RI E 9 1 Standard Features Internet Services 9 2 Interface Options 2 sereine Ee cea ekREEN ee GEES ditties 9 2 Services o E Eege 9 4 ie See EE 9 4 Stored Templates 9 5 QU eS Tab A EIET T eth aden Sacer doses aie de and 9 6 Status Tallon isco deeds cts nt ede ee EEN 9 7 Properties Jobs EEN nn EEN ENEE 9 8 Properties TEE 9 9 Maintenance Tabb cccseeeccecesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseceeseeenseceesesensneeeeeeenseeeseeenseeeeeeeesens 9 13 Assistance Feltes ee ee ee 9 14 Scanning with Internet Services sine 9 15 Public and Private Repositories AAA 9 15 Temp
2. Output SC d Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply ai SE NOTE The first Copy screen is Collated 1 1Siuei J 100 J Auto _J Tet J normally the default setting Colles J Li gt 2 Sed Auto Ces J Auto Stapled 2225da Casse BD Photo This can be changed by the e ES 2 gt 1 Sided Sex fix OE Key Operator ER Che E All Services The All Services button will be available for selection when the touch screen is not able to display the feature buttons for all the installed services Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 17 Product Overview gt Select All Services The pop up window will be displayed gt Select the Feature option required or select Close to cancel Job Status button P gt Select Job Status on the control panel The Print Queue is the default setting and will be automatically displayed gt Select Other Queues to display the queues available Print Queue Completed Print Jobs Queue Fax Queue Page 2 18 Ep coy Close Output ay Cee an a te SS Image GED GE 2 gt 1Sided J 4x1 1x17 J Tx J P Other 1 Other Other Use Job Status to check on the progress of a job and if necessary to change its position in a queue C Print Queue Q Fax Queue C Scan Queue C Completed Print Jobs Gy Completed Fax Jobs C Completed Scan Jobs NOTE The queues available are dependent o
3. gt Enter the next fax number A maximum of 50 numbers can be entered using Next Destination EU ml 4 Current Dial List A 22 l a j 005 d y 006 Y Page 4 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Next Destination The number appears in the list gt Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the numbers have been entered gt Select Save gt Select the character required gt Select Add gt Repeat the above steps for each character gt Select Enter to exit Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax Next Speed Dialing E Dial Directory D Current Dial List D T 2323 a a Res 2 4444 cy 5 vel 006 SSS NOTE If entering more than 50 numbers the message nput limit exceeded is displayed and the additional numbers are ignored HINT To cancel the job and all selected destinations select Stop Dialing Characters Dialing characters are special characters that are used for entering fax numbers Some characters are used only when auto dialing such as and Dialing characters are entered as part of the fax number As Dial Pause is so commonly used it is available as a button on the control panel and also in the list of Dialing Characters Dial pause C BE E Meier A Password check swit
4. Fax Setups G Auditron Setups gt Select Timers om Go Date Time pe Additional Setups Walkup Screen Localisati Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 13 Product Overview gt Select the option required gt The touch screen displays the current timer value Use the scroll buttons to apply the SC new setting and select Save ke Clear Select Close F Rower CE S Select Exit The touch _ ower sive screen displays Please wait exit routine in progress After a few seconds the screen reverts to the standard display The timer settings have now been changed 5 240 minutes Wi v Page 2 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Recycled Paper The DC 440 432 430 426 425 420 has established performance with the use of recycled paper with its consequent benefits to the environment Xerox recommends the following recycled paper that can be obtained both through Xerox and many other office suppliers 3R6296 8 1 2 x 11 20lb 5000 sheets with 30 post consumer waste 3R6299 11 x 17 20lb 2500 sheets with 30 post consumer waste The above is a small sample from a range of recycled media available from Xerox including a variety of different sizes weights and colors Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 15 Product Overview Modes There ar
5. 2 ten en eee nest meme ne Teapa asie EES ces cale 1 7 Safety Standards usine nina eon i tid ae ae dint tee 1 9 Regulatory Information enr 1 10 RCC Part Brain e n Ra tr a ta 1 10 EE HE eegene Eege di need aae eege 1 10 FCG Part TEE 1 11 Canadian GSI ua a e r aeaa ea dich Eeer ideetoes tue doves teas 1 13 taser Saloian n deniers Mead be ir PMU 1 14 Environmental Compliance sise 1 16 le VE EE 1 16 Environmental ChoiceM ss 1 16 UE UR ur DE 1 17 Ground Fault Interrupter GFI sise 1 20 2 Product Overview nn en nr cmt enn Enr teste 2 1 Identifying the machine components 2 2 Optional COMPONENMS cssecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseneeeeesseaeseseeeeeseaeseaseeeeeeneeseneeeeeneas 2 4 Power ei el 2 7 Powering ebe opdeele Eder 2 7 Powering e nansa aaie sos reinen es cer sement tee inde en men encued 2 9 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page i Page ii Power Save M Od OS en Eege autos Eege 2 10 Changing the Default Time Settings c cccccccseececeeesseeeeeeesseneeeeesessneeeeeeees 2 12 Modes tee te E ee crane 2 16 Features button 55e her es DR en tie TARA cede dh mas 2 17 JOD Status button RE 2 18 Machine Status button 2 19 System controls ccin ie i Rat 2 24 JOD InterrUpt ee EES EES 2 25 Auditron Access SCIeeN ccececeeeeecnceccccecsssssssseneseneneneeeeeeeeeeseuseseseecusesssseees 2 26 tel OUR Tt TEEN 2 27 CW TER 3 1 COPYING Drocedure snnnnnennnemnnennennnnn
6. NOTE When using covers with inserts the cover tray can be the same tray as one of the inserts tray The cover stock must be the same size and orientation as the body of the document Covers options the Covers feature is not available the machine automatically adds a cover page to the front of the set of documents the machine automatically adds a cover page to the front and back of the set of documents Once the Covers feature is selected the following two options will be available the machine automatically adds a blank cover s to the document Blank sheets do not have to be added to the documents the first and last if programmed page of the set of documents will be copied onto the cover stock Blank sheets must be added to the set of documents if only the front or the back cover is to be printed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE 1 gt 2 2 1 Build Job Uncollated Transparencies Envelope Tray Booklet Creation and Mixed Size Originals if 8 APS Auto Paper Select is selected cannot be used with the Covers feature If Annotation is selected with Printed Covers the annotation programmed will appear on the back cover Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 47 Job Assembly Copy Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select Copy Select Added Features Select Job Assembly Build Job Page 3 48 Use
7. gt Make changes as required gt Select Save Page 11 38 Fax Terminal Options SS Fax Terminal Options C Fax Printing Options O Fax Report Options Fax Panel Defaults C Fax Mailboxes Q Fax File Management NOTE Only those selections relevant to the machine configuration will be available Local ID According to the Federal Law the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 must be programmed with an identification number The identification number or Local ID is the telephone number for the machine If the identification number has not been programmed the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 displays a pop up message instructing users to enter the ID number before completing their jobs To ensure that this law is adhered to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 will not continue until the number is entered Entering the Local ID number is only required on the first occasion the machine is used Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Local ID lf more than 1 line is connected select the line to set the local ID gt Enter the telephone number of the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 using the keypad on the screen up to 20 characters including spaces gt Select Save gt Select Local Name Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Setups ETES E Local ID Sn rh Local ID Line 1 ime 13 T Local Name J Long Document Local ID Line 2 14 Company Logo LE
8. gt Select Services gt Select Job Submission Job Attributes will be displayed If required gt Type in the number of copies gt Using the drop down lists select other options gt Type the path and file name or select Browse if available to locate the file to be used gt Select the on screen green Start button to submit the job NOTE Existing preformatted jobs do not take priority over options that are set in Job Submission Job Based Accounting DC440 432 430 425 optional If Job Based Accounting has been setup on the DC440 432 430 425 users will be prompted to enter a User Name and Account ID before submitting the job to the machine Refer to Job Based Accounting optional DC440 432 430 425 on page 11 82 for more information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Stored Templates Stored Templates allows users to create modify and remove Scan to File templates that reside on the Document Centre The template itself determines the settings specific to that Scan job This option will only be available if Network Scanning has been enabled on the Document Centre gt Select Services gt Select Stored Templates gt Select the specific stored template required for the job If necessary use the new delete or copy buttons located at the top of the screen to create remove or copy a template NOTE If an entry has already been applied in Document Management
9. NOTE The Document Feeder must be used when scanning 2 sided documents select this feature to identify the orientation of the image before scanning This feature prints a single copy of the scanned image file on successful completion of the job NOTE Stapled output will not be available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Stored Image Settings gt Select Stored Image Settings gt Select the option required gt Select Save Resolution Output Image Format Defines the resolution and the file format in which to send scanned images ETES ap Resolution a 600 x 600 dpi DW 200 x 200 dpi Seau ue at 400 x 400 dpi DW 100 x 200 dpi ormat E 300 x 300 dpi Stored Image Settings Options defines the scan resolution options Select from 600 x 600 dpi 400 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 200 dpi or 100 x 200 dpi sets the format for scanned images to Tiff Multipage Tiff or PDF files DW Resolution It TIFF Output Image 7 Ponai ot Multipage TIFF GK NOTE The System Administrator sets up the default settings for Resolution and Output Image Format features via the Web UI Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 11 E mail lol 7 Erase gt Select Erase gt Select the option required gt Select Save Off Border Erase Edge Erase Page 7 12 HINT Multi page and Single page TIFF files are formatted with the TIF e
10. Page 9 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Status Tab The Status tab allows users to review the current status of the input and output trays available on the Document Centre gt Select Status The status of the Document Centre displays in the left frame The tray status including the size color and type of media tray availability and output tray is displayed in the right frame Use the scroll bars to view more information gt Select Refresh Status to update the information gt Select Reboot Machine to remotely reboot the machine NOTE The Reboot button can only be accessed by the System Administrator Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 7 Internet Services Properties Tab Properties are the settings that control the Document Centre and how it operates The settings contained within the Properties tab can only be modified by System Administrators gt Select Properties gt Select the option required Refer to the following table for more information about the options available Page 9 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Properties Features Feature Name Action General Setup System Contains the job option defaults and the actual location of the Document Centre Job Management DC440 432 430 425 Provides the System Administrator with the ability to set permissions for the category of user who may
11. Sf ext Basic Image Quality Options The following options are used to define what type of original is being used for scanning Text used for scanning text solids line art and halftones Auto used to scan documents that contain halftones and images or photographs Photo used for scanning continuous tone photographs HINT For best results scan a maximum of 5 photos in one job unless the machine has additional memory enhances documents that have colored backgrounds This option is disabled if the original type is Photo adjusts the density of copies and scanned images in the Text Auto and Photo mode enhances or decreases the sharpness level of fine lines and edges This feature is used with Photo mode Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 9 Network Scanning Sides Imaged gt Select Sides Imaged gt Select the options required gt Select Save 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided Side 2 is Rotated DC440 432 430 425 Image Orientation DC440 432 430 425 Print Local Copy DC440 432 430 425 Page 6 10 This feature enables users to scan single sided or double sided documents NOTE All scan jobs are stored as single sided images Image Orientation Print Local Copy Fa E Sided Side 2 is Rotated Sides Imaged Options scans side one of the document scans both sides of the document scans both sides of
12. deletes the selected job displays additional information about a job in the Scan Queue displays the other job queues available Completed Scan Jobs Queue Page 7 20 The Completed Scan Jobs Queue displays information on all completed scan jobs Completed jobs are those that have been either successfully completed or canceled due to a fault or at the user s request This queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time When the queue reaches its capacity the oldest jobs are deleted to make room for new jobs ka Scanned Filed Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Destination this is the destination folder for the job Type displays the filing protocol used either TCP IP or NetWare Owner the name of the template owner as defined in the template file Status information about a job such as active or faulted Scanned Filed the number of sheets scanned and the total number of pages already successfully stored at the remote location Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Scan Jobs Queue to manage the jobs Details displays additional information about a job in the Completed Scan Jobs Queue Other Queues displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 21 Page 7 22 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 8 Print Print When the
13. Page 5 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select All Services gt Select Media Print Copy AQ E mail Lei Fax aS GS SC gt 2 gt Sided J xN 1x17 J Nx 17 J Cc TTT try gt C e De Uncollatg CI gt Select Read Disk the files and directories contained on the diskette will be displayed V 3 pnnt The files and directories will be Je CS z displayed in the Directory List a Scroll through the list to find the file to be printed If the file is inside a subdirectory select the subdirectory to display the list of files E Close Directory gt To exit the subdirectory select Close Directory Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 5 3 Media Print gt Select the file to be printed The file name is automatically res added to the Print List Select Reint the name again to remove it from the list J Sg S A E H CGR gt When all of the files required J Close Directory appear in the Print List select J i Start The system reads the selected files and submits them for printing Select Print Queue in Job Status to review the job gt On completion remove the disk from the floppy drive NOTE The disk must remain in the floppy drive until the system has finished re
14. tworsided will be deleted p gt In the pop up window select Confirm to delete or Close to cancel gt The job will be deleted from the Job List Page 3 52 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Managing Copy Jobs Quick Pathway Select Job Status on the control panel The Print Queue will be displayed To display the Completed Print Job Queue select Other Queues and Completed Print Jobs Queue Print Queue Job Job management can be carried out on each individual job contained within the Print Queue The Print Queue maintains all pending and active jobs that are to be printed Paused jobs are considered active jobs These include network print jobs Fax print jobs report jobs and copy jobs The Print Queue can hold approximately 500 jobs at one time Jobs are placed in the queue according to job priority and type When full the queue will not accept any more jobs As space becomes available new jobs will enter the queue prse ewe oane mae Jomm mmm Job Name Owner Status Priority a number is assigned to identify each job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 53 Copy Name the name of the job For copy jobs a default name local is used For network print jobs and reports the name ofthe file is used For faxes received the name is typically the remote fax ID number NOTE Depending on the Third Pa
15. J EI Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Store for Polling Free polling Secure polling gt Load the Document gt Enter the fax number for the remote machine gt Select More Features gt Select Advanced Features gt Select Store for Polling gt Select Free Polling then Close gt Select Start Fax This feature stores documents in the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 memory where they can be retrieved by a remote fax machine Each time a store for polling job is started the new documents are added to any documents already stored There are two methods available the document is immediately sent when polled If documents are stored for secure polling and Store for free polling is selected the polling passwords stored will be deleted A confirmation pop up window will be displayed a password is required to retrieve the fax The document is sent if the machine recognizes the password used by the remote user The Document Centre must identify the remote terminal ID number as one of the passwords previously registered The machine checks the entire password and sends the document stored for polling if a match is successful NOTE The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 can hold 10 passwords of up to 20 numeric characters each Free Polling No documents are stored for pollin Zi Free Polling DW Delete Documents DW Secure Polling Lj Print Documents Xerox
16. loading paper preparation 2 loading short edge feed SEF paper 6 loading staples 12 loading staples convenience stapler 15 loading staples finisher 12 loading the envelope tray 9 loading the high capacity feeder 10 loading the paper trays 2 job completion setup DC420 local ID setup 38 80 job limit policy setup 74 job submission services 4 job template pool setup 94 junk fax prevention setup 64 K keypad fax 15 keypad server fax 54 L labels 28 LAN fax local area network 62 LAN fax features 62 language button 24 Laser Safety 14 left tray specifications 5 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide local name setup 39 localization 14 internetlogin name password network scanning 17 long document setup 42 low power mode 11 lower power mode setups 12 M machine components 2 optional 4 machine information machine status 20 machine serial number setup 17 machine setups 6 machine specifications 2 vii viii machine status 19 account information 22 counters 22 faults 21 machine information 20 paper supply status 20 print reports 21 reports and counters 21 mailbox add edit setup 54 mailbox files setup DC440 432 56 mailbox report setup 50 mailbox fax 30 maintenance 1 maintenance tab internet services 13 managing copy jobs 53 managing fax jobs 63 managing print jobs print 6 managing scan jobs 26 19 Manual Dialing Fax Telephone 13 manual stap
17. x 11 long edge feed paper If selecting Auto Reduce Enlarge and 8 1 2 x 11 long or short edge paper supply the machine automatically rotates the image 90 to match the orientation of the 8 1 2 x 11 documents and prints on to 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed paper However when using the Bypass Tray ensure that the paper is loaded short edge feed Feeding paper long edge feed will cause a mismatch with the reduction enlargement selection displays the two most frequently used preset reduce enlarge settings The presets are set up by the Key Operator used to specify a magnification not listed or to select normal or custom settings Normal reduces or enlarges the length and width of a document by a specific amount 100 Auto and the presets are also available For non standard sizes use the scroll buttons to choose a specific enlargement or reduction in 1 increments Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 17 Copy TS HINT To save time use the pop up keypad on the touch screen instead of the scroll buttons to insert values Select the display box for the size selections the small rectangle to the left of the scroll buttons and a keypad will be displayed Enter the values and select Save Custom used to reduce or enlarge a document in non equal proportions Again 100 and Auto are available to reset the magnification after using a custom setting TS HINT When Custom Redu
18. 72 D x 88 1 2 W 1828mmD x 2247mmW DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with Duplex Module Finisher Finisher Stand or High Capacity Feeder Finisher Output Tray Tower Mailbox 72 D x 104 1 2 W 1828mmD x 2654mmW Machine Weight Basic configuration approximately 265lbs Accessibility From the front and sides Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Copier Speed from paper tray 1 DC420 One sided Two sided DC425 One sided Two sided DC426 One sided Two sided DC430 432 One sided Two sided DC440 One sided Two sided 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 20 cpm 11 x 17 SEF 10 cpm 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 20 copies per side 11 x 17 SEF 10 copies per side 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 25 cpm 11 x 17 SEF 20 cpm 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 25 copies per side 11 x 17 SEF 20 copies per side 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 30 cpm 11 x 17 SEF 14 cpm 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 30 copies per side 11 x 17 SEF 14 copies per side 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 32 cpm 11 x 17 SEF 20 cpm 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 23 copies per side 11 x 17 SEF 14 copies per side 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 40 com 11 x 17 SEF 20 cpm 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 31 copies per side 11 x 17 SEF 14 copies per side First Copy Out Time for the DC426 420 Center Tray using the Document Feeder 6 seconds Center Tray using the Platen Glass 4 7 seconds Left Tray after the job is scanned Firs
19. Controling jobs includes organizing advancing and initiating jobs based on their characteristics The Scan Queue and the Completed Scan Jobs Queue will only be available in Job Status after E mail and Network Scanning has been enabled The Scan Queue displays all active scan jobs Once a job has been completed the job is deleted from this queue and displayed in the Completed Scan Jobs queue ms pae Jone om Status Scanned Filed This queue maintains active and pending Scan jobs The Scan Queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time Active jobs appear at the top of the queue other jobs follow in descending order based on the job completion time When the queue reaches its capacity the oldest jobs are deleted to make room for new jobs If all 50 jobs are active and pending jobs no new jobs will be added until an active job is completed Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 19 E mail Destination Type Owner Status Scanned Filed Delete Details Other Queues this is the destination folder for the job the type of job based on the network setup the name of the template owner as defined in the template file information about the progress of a job such as active or faulted the number of sheets scanned and filed for active jobs Use the toolbar across the top of the Scan Queue to manage the jobs
20. Copy Copying procedure Quick Pathway Load documents Press Features If necessary select Copy Select the Copy features required 1 Load the documents Page 3 2 Before making copies on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 identify what is to be copied and the number of copies required Use the following steps to make a copy using the Document Centre NOTE If the Auditron has been enabled on the machine an account number may be required before programming can commence For account allocation or further information about the Auditron please contact the Key Operator HINT When programming a copy job on a network connected machine select Job Interrupt first The Document Centre will not complete any network jobs allowing the copy job to be programmed and completed without interruption Refer to Job Interrupt on page 2 25 for more information A choice of document input areas is available These are Adocument feeder for single or multiple documents Adocument glass for single documents or bound originals NOTE A document glass cover will be fitted on the DC425 cabinet configuration Document Feeder Up to 50 documents can be scanned at one time using the document feeder Ensure the documents are of the same size in good condition and all staples or paper clips removed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE To reduce the risk of document feeder jams place folded or creased
21. Delete in 24 hours DC426 420 Keep Page 11 56 Mailbox Files DC440 432 430 425 Failed Fax Files DC426 420 Displays a list of fax jobs that were unsuccessful after attempting to send the job a specified number of times depending on current settings Es Mailbox Files a Auto Delete et Files for Polling DW Keep Refer to the following descriptions for more information automatically deletes all failed fax documents automatically deletes all failed fax documents after 24 hours keeps all failed fax documents until they are manually deleted Files for Polling DC440 432 430 425 Contains data for documents scanned and stored in memory in order to send them to a remote terminal when polled On the DC426 420 this feature is known as Files Stored for Polling Refer to the following description for more information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Files for Polling gt Select the required default setting a description of each fo lows J Mailbox Files J Auto Delete gt Select Save Select SE i Files for Polling E A Auto Delete automatically deletes stored fax files after they have been transmitted Keep keeps stored fax files after they have been transmitted until they are manually deleted Fax Communication Setups This section contains the procedures to set the following Outgoing Fax Options page 11 58 Select Incoming Fax Options page
22. NOTE It is recommended that Setups should not be accessed until the machine has completed its power on sequence For further information about assigning PINs refer to Access Rights on page 11 86 If a PIN is entered that has been assigned Key Operator access rights the user can set up or change the machine and feature settings These include some or all of the following dependent on machine configuration enable machine specific default settings to be changed or set up including paper tray defaults machine date and time settings the touch screen display machine timers and reports For further information refer to Machine Setups on page 11 6 is used to disable a faulty component so that other components and features may still be used For further information refer to Fault Override on page 11 19 enable the Copy specific default settings to be changed or set up Refer to Copy Setups on page 11 25 for further information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax Setups enable the Fax specific default settings to be changed or set up Refer to Fax Setups on page 11 34 for further information System Administrator Tools If a PIN is entered that has been assigned System Administrator access rights the user can set up or change the settings for the Network Scanning E mail Fax and Print features Refer to System Administrator Tools on page 11 3 or
23. Page iv Sending a Fax using Server Fax ss 4 45 Standard Features Server Fax ccsscssessesseeesesseeeeeeeseeneenseessneesneesseensenenes 4 48 EE 4 48 Original Type nr Una unten cn ten a en tas 4 49 Te LE KEE 4 50 EI WEE ain arden tn int is 4 51 More Fax Features Server Fax sssnenennnnne 4 55 Light r Darkeris ssh AR nine EENS 4 55 le HENN 4 56 Delayed Start Auge ae AEN 4 57 Authentication Mode Server Fax ss ssssnennnnns 4 58 Login Guest ACCESS sde EEN satis ech fed ardent 4 58 Login Network Authenticated ACCESS trae eteeeeeee 4 59 Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access seseeeseeeeeene 4 60 Changing the Authentication Service sseeseeersererererrerreerisrrerrrsrerrreerns 4 60 Logging KEE 4 61 LAN Fax Local Area Network Fax 4 62 LAN Fax Feature Seina E bic lens sentis E geed 4 62 Managing Fax JOBS sees 4 63 Pa QUOUC eebe eege eege eebe eege ee 4 63 Completed Fax Jobs Queue un 4 65 Connecting Fax to the ISDN Digital Line Embedded Fax DC440 432 430 425 4 67 5 Media Print siscstsisscesccescccteecieeidasiisniinscnsedenstaricanseccdenddewdsentiisbevaiens 5 1 Using Media Prini tee EEN 5 2 6 Network Scanning inennns 6 1 Network Scanning eege nn tend entr le tn ee 6 2 Templates and template list 6 4 Public and Private Templates 0 c cc ccececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaee
24. Select Features located on the left of the numeric keypad Ensure that the first 2 Copy screen is displayed Output aan Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply ed Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto Text J Uncollated 1 gt 2 Sided J Auto J 82x10 J Auto Stapled 2 gt 2 Sided J 84 5 gt BY x14 8 x ND Photo 2 gt 1 Sided J B84 xN gt 11x17 J Nx 17 J ISS Tr CR ei Other Other Other et Page 3 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Clear All once to cancel any previous screen programming selections NOTE Selecting Clear Alltwice will clear all the programming pathways and return the machine to its default status Features Button 3 Select the features gt Select the button for the feature required The button changes to white If Other is selected select Save to confirm the selected feature or Cancel to return to the previous screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Clear All Button The features available on the first Copy screen are those used most often Many of the features contain a selection called Other Select this option to access additional programming options NOTE Only those features relevant to the machine configuration will be available Ep Ory Output Features Sides Image Imaged Quality Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto Text Uncollated 1 gt 2 Sided
25. Select the template at the Document Centre gt Scan the document The document is scanned to the repository gt Access PaperPort and retrieve the scanned document file within PaperPort HINT For best results select Text in Original Type Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Scan to Fax To save time when sending faxes users can set up Scan to Fax templates using Internet Services gt Create a template for Fax Services Refer to Template Operations on page 9 23 for information on creating a template gt Enter the recipient s fax number A maximum of 100 characters can be entered NOTE Select Add to add the number to the phone list or highlight a number in the list and select Delete to remove the number from the list gt Select the fax template at the Document Centre gt Scan the document The document is faxed NOTE Scan to Fax jobs cannot be accessed or modified at the Document Centre Scan with Local Copy A hard copy document can be scanned and converted into electronic format and printed gt Create a template in Internet Services for File and Print with Local Copy Services Refer to Template Operations on page 9 23 for information on creating a template gt Select the features required for the template gt Select the template at the Document Centre gt Load the document and select Start gt The document is printed according to the Local Copy setting
26. Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Fax Setups NOTE If only Server Fax or Embedded Fax is installed on selection of Fax Setups the ne SCH relevant setup screen will automatically be displayed eo Setups Copy Setups Additional ca Setups Fax Setups C Network Scanning Auditron Setups gt If necessary select the Fax option required NOTE This screen will only be eer displayed if both Embedded ee Fax and Server Fax are installed on the machine C Server Fax Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 35 Setups Server Fax Setups DC440 432 430 425 Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Enter Key Operator PIN Select Fax Setups If both Embedded and Server Fax are installed select Server Fax Select Enable Disable Enable Disable Confirmation Report Output Tray Options Network Setups Page 11 36 Once Server Fax has been installed on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 it will need to be enabled and the filing repositories set up within the required network configuration Please refer to the System Administration Guide or contact your System Administrator for further assistance Enable Disable Confirmation Report E Network Setups Q Output Tray Options disables or enabled Server Fax confirms whether the fax has been successfully scanned and filed to the 3rd Party Fa
27. a selection that prevents the machine from automatically answering the telephone private data that the machine conceals when the forward slash key is selected by displaying special characters in the place of the private data prints Postscript and PCL files from a floppy disk inserted into the floppy disk drive in the machine a capacity for storing documents a number that identifies a network It works like an address sizes other than 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 14 and 11 x 17 the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is not connected to a tracking system a report that lists the options currently installed on the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Output Owner Password Pathway PCL Files PDF Peer to Peer Pending Jobs Report Photo Polling Portrait PostScript Files Power Saver Modes Printer Configuration Report Printer Jam Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide finished copies or received fax documents a designated user who can assign machine access rights to other users a four digit number that provides access to and protects an electronic mailbox the route or the buttons a user is required to select to display a feature such as Copy or Fax Printer Control Language file the command language for the HP LaserJet printers Portable Document File a network environment in which the nodes communi
28. and select Modify Account gt Select the services and copy limits for the selected account Cancel save gt Select Savel M Counter Limit 100 2 000 000 2000000 J Change Limit J No Limit J Not Allowed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 71 Setups All Limits the same Change Limit No Limit Not Allowed bl F gt Select the account number to be deleted gt Select Delete Account gt Select Confirm gt Select Close Page 11 72 use the popup keypad to enter a limit in units of 100 to restrict the number of prints which can be assigned to this account for all the services selected use the popup keypad to enter a limit in units of 100 to restrict the number of prints which can be assigned to this account for each service selected select this button to assign no restriction on the number of prints for this account for each service selected a value of 0 will be displayed No prints can be allocated to this account for the service selected HINT Users can check the status of their accounts by selecting Machine Status on the Control Panel Auditron is on the Reports amp Counters tab Delete Account Close hdd Account Account Number 1234 delete Account Press Confirm to delete this account lodify Account Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Reset All Counters gt T
29. build job 48 collated output 11 completed print jobs queue covers 45 options 46 edit DC420 33 edit options DC420 33 erase 29 options 30 expert image quality 28 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide options 29 copying procedure 2 image adjustment 22 1 load the documents 2 image quality 20 2 select the features options 20 button 6 image shift 27 3 select the features 7 options 27 4 enter the quantity 8 5 select start 9 er 6 identify the job in th job assembly 48 j y Jo g n up 36 print queue 9 counters machine status 22 cover letter cover page fax 19 covers options copy 46 original input DC420 22 original size 22 original size options 23 P covers copy 45 output format 34 e COPY page edit 32 customer support number page edit options 33 e setup 16 paper supply 18 options 19 data coupler information 11 date setup 9 print quele s3 date time setup 9 ie a NEW default repository setup 94 comment 40 delayed send server fax 57 reduce enlarge 16 delayed start time setup 41 options 17 delayed start fax 22 sides imaged 14 delete account setups 72 orientation 15 delete all accounts setups 73 standard features 10 delete documents fax 29 stored jobs 50 delete mailbox contents fax 32 deleting a storeddelete mailbox setup 55 copy job 52 deleting a stored copy job 52 retrieving a copy jobdial directory setup fax 37 52 dial directory deleting a number fax 4
30. gt Select the required template gt Select Copy copy of the template automatically appears on the screen gt Enter a new name for the template an optional template description and if required the owner of the template gt Select Apply An exact copy of the original template all service parameters remain with the new name will appear in the left frame gt Select this template and make any required changes NOTE Use the Add Edit or Delete buttons to create modify or delete a Document Management Field entry Deleting a template gt Select Stored Templates gt Select the template that is to be deleted gt Select Delete The template is automatically deleted from the left frame and the screen returns to the Stored Template banner page Prior to scanning a document and creating an electronic file users must firstly set up the parameters for the job on a template within Internet Services The template can then be Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide selected and the hard copy document scanned in at the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 The scanned files are then saved to either a public or private repository Scanning to a public repository gt Create a scan template for Scan and File Services Refer to Template Operations on page 9 23 for information on creating a template gt Select the template In the template s File service select Public as the Repository an
31. paper When printing from a workstation load paper SEF when making copies load LEF 8 1 2 x 11 Letter Standard documents e Trays 1 2 3 4 load SEF or Paper letters forms LEF 500 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper e Bypass Tray load SEF or LEF 50 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper A4 SEF paper cannot be fed from the bypass tray when printing network jobs e High Capacity Feeder load LEF 2000 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper 8 1 2 x 11 Xerox Standard documents le Trays 1 2 3 4 load SEF or brand Recycled Paper LEF 500 sheets maximum 20lbsubstance 20 paper e Bypass Tray load SEF or LEF 50 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper 8 1 2 x 11 SEF paper cannot be fed from the bypass tray when printing network jobs e High Capacity Feeder load LEF 2000 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper Page 10 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Media Use Specifications 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Paper Legal documents Trays 1 2 3 4 load SEF 500 sheets maximum 20Ib substance 20 paper Bypass Tray load SEF 50 sheets maximum 201b substance 20 paper High Capacity Feeder do not use in this tray 11 x 17 the DC440 432 430 425 requires 64MB of memory otherwise the machine will not print on these sizes Over sized or enlarged documents ledgers Trays 1 2 3 4 load
32. right of the screen to select the types colors and sizes of Jee Reduction F oer Attributes meee paper on which incoming fax ke SA Jo T documents and reports will Paper Siz be printed more than one Jee Printing C type can be selected gt Select Save Output Selection Programs the output tray for incoming fax documents NOTE Output Selection features will depend on product configuration gt Select Output Selection gt Select the default output option required the available i options are dependent on Jee Reduction Jee Attributes prod uct co nfi g u ratio n LJ Page Margin Output Selection J Left Tray E Duplex Printing CH Stapled or HINT Typically the Left Tray is the default fax tray the Center Ke Tray is the default copy tray If a Finisher is installed the options will include Finisher Stapled Centre Tray Page 11 46 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select A3 gt 11 x 17 gt Select the option required Fax Report Options gt Select Activity Report gt Select the default option required see description below Auto Print is the factory default A3 gt 11 x 17 DC440 432 430 425 Programs incoming fax documents to be printed on a different size paper For example an incoming A3 size European standard fax can be trimmed to print on 11 x 17 paper Alternatively choose to have the machine redu
33. simply select Speed Dial and enter the three digit speed dial number For information about setting up the Dial Directory refer to Dial Directory on page 4 16 Fax Select this button Enter this data Results Speed Dial 123 To dial the fax number assigned to speed dial number 123 Speed Dial 12 To dial a continuous block of numbers For example if the members of the Sales Department are assigned numbers beginning with 12 the acts as a wildcard and selects numbers 0 9 The fax is sent to speed dial numbers 120 129 Speed Dial To dial all speed dial numbers The acts as a wildcard and selects all numbers Speed Dial 01 To dial group number 01 SH the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Rd HINT To save time print the Dial Directory and display it near Page 4 15 To add numbers to the Current Dial List gt Select the number from the Dial Directory list and select Next Destination gt Select the next number to be added to the list and select Next Destination gt Repeat the above steps until all of the numbers added are displayed in the Current Dial List maximum of 50 numbers can be added Page 4 16 Dial Directory The Dial Directory contains frequently used fax numbers It also contains Speed Dial and Group Dialnumbers Names and numbers can be added to the Dial Directory by using Dial
34. to 10 characters gt Select Save gt Select Next Mailbox to program another mailbox Select Previous Mailbox to return to a previous mailbox gt Select Save and then Close Page 11 54 To Add or Edit a Mailbox Previous Next Cancel seve Mailbox j Mailbox Mailbox 01 Mailbox 01 4444 0000 9999 Change Keyboard Save xerox PEE Ea HES ES Fc HES E ES Fr EE Le a en JVs OC je seh ES CER ES I ES SH E WE UE IS ES E wa gt HINT Select Change Keyboard to access 7 additional characters Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide To Delete a Mailbox gt Select Delete Mailbox gt Select Confirm to delete the selected mailbox and its contents contains Press Confirm to delete this mailbox and any documents it Fax File Management gt Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on Fax Terminal Setups on page 11 37 gt Select Fax File Management gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows gt Make changes as required Jens er gt Select Save Je for Polling UE Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Setups Page 11 55 gt Onthe DC440 432 430 425 select Mailbox Files On the DC426 420 select Failed Fax Files gt Select the required default setting Auto Delete
35. transmission report contains details about the fax and a reduced copy of the image from the first page of the fax When sending a fax to multiple recipients broadcast one transmission report will be printed listing all of the recipients gt Load the document gt Select More Features Cancel save gt Select Transmission Report EI gt Select On P Off On gt Select Save and then Start Lighter Darker Adjusts the image quality of the document being scanned for fax transmissions gt Load the document gt Select More Features gt Select Lighter Darker EE gt Use the scroll bars to a Ee increase or decrease the Normal Darker image adjustment v gt Select Save and select Start Page 4 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Communication Mode DC440 432 430 425 gt Load the document gt Select More Features gt Select Communications Mode gt Select the required option gt Select Save and then Start Super G3 G3 Forced 4800 bps On the DC440 432 430 425 this feature allows selection of the communication mode used for transmission to a remote fax machine NOTE On the DC426 420 the Forced 4800 bps feature is the only available option eve so a Super G3 336 Kbps DW G3 14 4 Kbps et Forced 4800 bps The following options are available determines the communication mo
36. 1 15 About This Guide Environmental Compliance Energy Star Environmental Choice Page 1 16 lant METAL Xerox Corporation designed this product to comply with the guidelines of the ENERGY STAR program of the Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR Partner Xerox has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Your Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 will be delivered with the timer for switching to Low Power Mode from the last copy print out set at 15 minutes The time to switch to power save auto off sleep mode is set at 60 minutes from the last copy print out A more detailed description of these modes together with instructions on changing the default times to suit your work pattern can be found in the Power Save Modes on page 2 10 of this User Guide Terra Choice Environmental Services Inc of Canada has verified that this Xerox X productcor conforms to all applicable Environmental Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the environment Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Illegal Copying Congress by statute has forbidden the copying of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such copies gt Obligations or Securities of the United States Government such as Certificates of Indebtedness Coupons from Bo
37. 426 425 420 Please refer to the following for more information Embedded Fax Walk up fax on the Document Centre provided by a built in embedded fax device within the machine Users must select the Fax tab to access the Embedded Fax features Server Fax DC440 432 430 Walk up fax available on a Document Centre linked to a 425 network The document is scanned and then saved in a location from which a Third Party Server Fax collects and forwards it Users must select the Fax tab to access the Server Fax features NOTE Both Embedded Fax and Server Fax can be installed BUT only one can be enabled at any one time NOTE Restricted access can be applied to the Server Fax features Please refer to Authentication Mode Server Fax on page 4 58 or contact the System Administrator for further information LAN Fax Allows PC clients to send faxes via a Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 This is accessed via CentreWare software NOTE For DC440 432 430 425 LAN Fax and Server Fax cannot be installed at the same time For more information please refer to Embedded Fax page 4 2 Server Fax 440 432 430 425 page 4 44 LAN Fax page 4 62 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 1 Embedded Fax Procedure Please refer to the following steps on how to send a quick fax Quick Pathway from the Document Centre using the standard features Load documents available within Embedded Fax Press Fe
38. 426 425 420 User Guide Print from Mailbox gt Select More Features gt Select Advanced Features gt Select Fax Mailbox ke to Mailbox gt Select Print from Mailbox BE Le gt Using the keypad on the Joue Mailbox Contents Fax Enter Mailbox number 001 200 TT Enter Mailbox password 0000 9999 then press Start control panel enter the mailbox number gt Using the keypad on the control panel enter the four digit mailbox password 0000 9999 The password will be displayed as gt Select Enter After the document is printed it is deleted Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 31 Delete Mailbox Contents gt Select More Features gt Select Advanced Features T Store to Mailbox gt Select Fax Mailbox Enter Mailbox number 001 200 _ gt Select Delete Mailbox J ae Enter Mailbox password 0000 9999 then press Start Contents a Delete Mailbox Contents gt Using the keypad on the control panel enter the mailbox number gt Using the keypad on the control panel enter the four digit mailbox password 0000 9999 The password will be displayed as gt Select Enter The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 confirms deletion after the mailbox number and password have been entered Page 4 32 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Mixed Size O
39. 68 for more information gt Select External Control Device Make selections as required a description of each follows NOTE The default password is 22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been assigned o off E ee without imits Per Page Monitor with Control limits to specify that a Foreign Interface Device is not connected to set the device for tracking each page in each job separately For example for a coin operated device set External Auditron to Per Page Control Otherwise more than the current page will be printed even though only one coin was inserted Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Monitor without limits to set the device to track the usage of the machine but not to limit users to a number of copies or prints Setups Monitor with limits to set the device to track the usage of the machine but limit users to a number of copies or prints Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 85 Access Rights Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter Owner PIN see NOTE Select Additional Setups if necessary Select Access Rights Setups Page 11 86 Personal Identification Numbers PINs and privileges are assigned to users who need to access the Setup Tools Up to 100 PINs each between 4 and 16 digits long may be assigned There are different levels of privileges dep
40. Booklet Creation in Output Format gt Select On gt Enter the quantity required and select Start Load originals into Document Feeder Long Edge Feed e NOTE H the document is 8 1 2 x 11 and 11 x 17 paper is selected as the output the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 prints the booklet at 100 If a paper size is not selected the machine defaults to the same size paper as the document and reduces the images to fit Covers DC440 432 430 425 gt Load the cover stock into the required paper tray gt The Change Attributes window will be displayed Program the new paper stock and select Save gt Select the features required gt Select Added Features and then Output Format gt Select Covers Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide This feature enables paper or card covers to be added to a copy job Use the following steps to add covers to a job in caes So Off Front Only Front and Back COE Page 3 45 Copy gt Select either Front Only or Front and Back gt Select Blank Covers or Printed Covers gt Select the cover stock tray Select Save gt Load the documents and select Start Off Front only Front amp Back Blank Covers Printed Covers Page 3 46 vtec Ch Zz Blank Covers fea Front Only E En a m Printed Covers High Capacity Feeder J Bypass Tray l
41. Copy gt Select the features required gt Select Added Features gt Select Bound Originals and select the features required gt Select Save gt Select Start Off Side 1 Side 2 1 and 2 Book size Page 3 26 Bound Originals options im ct So Book Size Book Placement 1x7 D Ch G SR R CET Gutter Erase m mE Qe the feature is not available copies only the page on the left when looking at the open book face up copies only the page on the right when looking at the open book face up copies both pages of an open book and places each page on a separate sheet of paper use this option if the open book size is anything other than 11 x 17 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Gutter Erase Image Shift gt Select the features required gt Load the document Ensure that the documents are in the same orientation as the media loaded in the paper trays gt Select Added Features gt Select Image Shift and the option required gt Select Save and Save again gt Enter the quantity and select Start Off Auto Center Margin Shift Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide erases up to 2 in from the gutter area down the center of a bound document When the 7 and 2 option is selected any amount from 0 2 in can be entered Use this feature to change the position of the image on a pag
42. Directory Setup on the Reports amp Setups tab Refer to Dial Directory Setup on page 4 37 for more information When a name is selected from the list the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 automatically enters the corresponding number or group of numbers Speed Dial numbers are at the beginning of the list and Group Dial numbers are at the end Use the Speed Dial button to quickly jump to a location in the Dial Directory For example to jump from number 5 to 150 select Speed Dial and enter 150 Speed Dial can be accessed from any of the fax screens Use the scroll buttons to move through the speed dial numbers and groups in the Dial Directory The Current Dial List displays the list of telephone numbers that the fax will be sent to Next Speed Dialin b i vote OE om even sove E Fe SR Wee Current Dial List SEW SA A Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide To delete numbers from the Current Dial List select Delete The machine automatically selects the last number Numbers cannot be deleted out of order always start with the last number on the list Each speed dial fax number can have a specific setup and cover letter More than one number can be selected if sending a fax to more than one recipient The Dial Directory can store a maximum of 200 numbers Each speed dial telephone number can contain a maximum of 39 characters digits spaces and pauses
43. En ENG MC BGREAL COM gt Complete login to User Name and Password Jesse BGREAL COM Network Scanning DW SALES MC BGREAL COM If required please contact the System Administrator for further assistance Logging Off gt Select Access A A warning message will be FER EES Cancel 9 displayed Original Size You have selected to Log Off from the gt Select OK e Authentication Service Select OK to confirm Ge Normal Select Cancel to remain Authenticated 100 amea gra NOTE If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or Auditron at the same time as Authentication the user will be logged off the other service at the same time as logging off from Authentication Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 25 Managing Scan Jobs Quick Pathway Select Job Status on the control panel Select Other Queues Select Scan Queue or Completed Scan Jobs Queue Scan Queue Page 6 26 Managing the Scan queues consists of maintaining each job within the queue Job management is performed on each individual job contained within the queue Controling jobs includes organizing advancing and initiating jobs based on their characteristics The Scan Queue and the Completed Scan Jobs Queue will only be available in Job Status after Network Scanning or E mail has been enabled The Scan Queue displays all active scan jobs Once a job has been completed the job is deleted
44. Fer EN ee SRE make selections for the next Ve E section of the job and select Original Size Expert Image Quality Auto Sharpness Normal Sta rt Auto Exposure Off Repeat the steps above for each selection of the job After the last section has been scanned select End Build Job to indicate that the job has been completed The machine will complete the quantity selected Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 49 Copy NOTE nserts or Interrupt cannot be used with Build Job The Build Job 2 Sided selection will only copy Portrait documents in Head to Head or Head to Toe orientation Fr HINT If a memory fault occurs it is advisable to reduce the number of originals from 50 to 40 The number of originals that can be scanned depends on the complexity of the document being scanned Stored Jobs Up to 8 combinations of feature selections can be retained in the machine memory as stored jobs The machine stores only the programming for the job not the image Each time a stored job is used the image must be scanned The Stored Job touch screen displays a list of all stored jobs Stored jobs are set to Off as the default Contact the Key Operator to change this feature to On To store a job gt Program the job features gt Select Added Features Eyo mage utpu o oa gt Select Job Assembly Build Job Stored Jobs Off gt Select Stored Job Page 3 5
45. Image Output Adjustment Format Original Size Basic Image Quality Sides Imaged Auto Sharpness Normal 1 Sided Auto Exposure Off Portrait Lighter Darker Normal Stored Image Settings Erase 300 x 300 dpi Off PDF Print Local Copy Off Page 7 7 E mail Original Size gt Select Original Size gt Select the option required gt Select Save Page 7 8 Auto Custom Standard Used to enter the size of the document when scanning from the Document Glass or the Document Feeder x 1 55 Vin 55 1169in gt Original Size Options accepts the machine s automatic size sensing Do not use Auto for non standard sizes The machine cannot sense the size of non standard documents NOTE Auto is the default setting Mixed Size Originals is always enabled to Auto to define the size by programming the X and Y settings for non standard sizes Use either the scroll bars to enter the value or select a numeric box to display a pop up screen and enter the value using the keypad displayed This feature can only be used when a document is placed on the document glass pre set document sizes automatically available in the Paper Size list This feature can only be used when a document is placed on the document glass Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Basic Image Quality gt Select Basic Image Quality gt Select the option
46. In addition a telephone number from the dialing keypad can also be entered Use this is an alternative to selecting a speed dial number from the dial directory Up to 120 digits or special characters can be entered using this method Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 17 Fax More Features Embedded Fax Quick Pathway Select Features button on the control panel If necessary select Fax Select More Features Page 4 18 When the More Features tab is selected additional tabs are displayed For more information please refer to Advanced Features page 4 24 Reports and Setups page 4 34 NOTE If Fax is the default screen this tab will be called Added Features On selection it will change to More Features More Advanced Reports amp Features Features Setups Cover Letter Transmission Report Lighter Darker C Off C Off C Lighter 2 Communication Mode Delayed Start Send Priority C G3 C Off SCH Normal This tab contains specific features to modify a fax For more information about the features available refer to the following Cover Letter page 4 19 Transmission Report page 4 20 Lighter Darker page 4 20 Communications Mode DC440 432 430 425 Forced 4800 Mode DC426 420 page 4 21 Delayed Start page 4 22 Send Priority DC440 432 430 425 page 4 23 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Cover Letter Cover Page Fax Use thi
47. Ordering SUPPlieS sssssss essences east ciedeeedeeavececcesevetieentbecesessteeeedcte 12 2 Cleaning the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 nn rnnnrrrsrerrnnnmmeennemmennennens 12 3 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide The Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass 12 3 The Control Panel and Touch Screen 12 4 The Document Feeder and Output Trays c ccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeteneees 12 4 Replacing the Copy Print Cartridge es 12 5 Removing the old Copy Print Cartridge ccceceeeeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeesenaeeeeas 12 5 Recycling the Copy Print Cartridge 12 9 Inserting the new Copy Print Cartridge ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 12 9 Loading Staples 8 08 ENEE NEEN saae 12 12 Finisher Le le E EE 12 12 Convenience Stapler optional 12 15 13 Problem SOIVINg sssssrscssseninmureincasa nneunsnannnitennrennes 13 1 Fault Clearance Procedure snnnnnnnnnnnennnnes 13 2 El aring Jare eessen eege dE 13 3 Problem Solving Tables nent 13 4 Fault Codes and Messages ienennnnes 13 16 Table of ET lee 13 16 Output el E TEE 13 19 Call for Service procedure sms 13 20 Xerox Welcome Center Telephone Number 13 20 14SpectiCAtiONS sssssisccssnenresveisenennrenasannernnennannessanvinneunnus 14 1 Machine Specifications eennnennnnennes 14 2 Electrical Specifications ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeseeeee
48. The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 adheres to strict specifications approvals and certifications These specifications are designed to provide for the safety of users and to ensure that the machine operates in a fully functional state Use the specifications listed in this chapter to quickly identify the capability of the machine If further specification information is required please contact your Xerox Representative Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 14 1 Specifications Machine Specifications Page 14 2 Hardware Configuration Simplex DC425 cabinet configuration processor C rack with scanner cabinet with 1 tray and a Bypass Tray Duplex processor C rack with Document Feeder and scanner duplex module 4 paper trays stand and a Bypass Tray NOTE The above hardware configurations are for the standard machine configuration Space Requirements DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with Duplex Module Duplex Catch Tray 72 D x 67 W 1828mmD x 1701mmW DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with High Capacity Feeder 72 D x 72 W 1828mmD x 1828mmW DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with Finisher Finisher Stand or High Capacity Feeder Finisher Output Tray Duplex 72 D x 79 W 1828mmD x 2006mmW DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with Convenience Shelf Duplex Catch Tray 72 D x 79 1 2 W 1828mmD x 1943mmW DC440 432 430 426 425 420 with Finisher Finisher Stand or High Capacity Feeder Convenience Shelf Duplex
49. The following describes the options available when creating a template with Document Management Fields information defines a name for the Document Management Fields data This value is not shown on the Document Centre touch screen The Field Name is used by the third party software to access the Document Management Fields data Up to 128 characters can be entered This option cannot be left blank defines the prompt message that is to be displayed to the user at the Document Centre Up to 50 characters can be entered although only 25 characters will be displayed on the touch screen This option is displayed but cannot be edited at the touch screen defines the actual data that is to be assigned to a particular Control Panel Prompt This value can contain any value including blanks and can be edited by the user at the machine Up to 128 characters can be entered although only 60 will be displayed at the machine The Field Name Control Panel Prompt and Default Value are referred to as a single Document Management Fields entry Up to six entries can be programmed for each template NOTE Contact the Xerox representative for more information about the Third Party Software that can be used to access image files referenced with Document Management Fields data Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Template Operations Once a System Administrator has defined the repositories and default templates the templates are av
50. Tray a Left Tray and a Finisher NOTE A6 size paper should not be fed to the Finisher The Center Tray is the default output tray Output will be delivered face down and offset to the Center Tray Copy sets delivered to the Left Tray will be face up and are not offset Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE The Left Tray will not be available when custom size paper has been programmed Features Services 7 O u ip u t l con Output SE d Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply na Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto J Text J T T E Bai Ws HINT Use the Output Icon located on the lower left hand side of the screen to quickly and easily switch from the Center Tray to the Left Tray Collated This option delivers the specified number of copy sets to the Center Tray in the same order as the documents If selecting 1 2 3 two copies of a three page document the order of the output 1 2 3 will be pages 1 2 3 1 2 3 Ess Uncollated This option delivers the copies to the Center Tray in the order 3 3 based on the total number of copies for each document The order of the output for two copies of a three page document will 2 2 be 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 1 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 11 Copy 1 2 3 gt Select and
51. Up to 100 delayed send jobs can be programmed at one time depending on the size of the documents and the available memory Only one delayed poll can be saved at a time Use the Fax Job Monitor feature to check the available memory Lk Current Time e a ER a P Hours y Minutes y 00 23 00 59 NOTE If a power outage occurs all pending delay start jobs will be queued to start immediately once power is restored Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Send Priority DC440 432 430 425 gt Select More Features gt Select Send Priority gt Select either Normal or High gt Select Save Fax Use this feature to choose either a high or normal priority for a fax job If Normalis selected the job will not be sent until all the high priority jobs have been sent NOTE Send Priority can be used with Delayed Start lz E Normal J Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 23 Advanced Features Embedded Fax Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select Fax Select More Features Select Advanced Features gt Select More Features gt Select Advanced Features the options available will be displayed Page 4 24 7 Fax More Advanced Reports amp All Features Features Setups Services The Advanced Features tab offers additional programming features that can be appl
52. User Guide Auditron Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Conirol Panel Select on the control panel Enter the Auditron Administrator PIN see NOTE Select Enter in the pop up window Select Auditron Setups Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide The Auditron feature enables machine usage to be tracked and or controlled preventing unauthorized access to the machine and enabling recharges for prints to be applied The options available are described below the chosen option must initially be enabled by the Xerox Service representative NOTE The default password is 22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been assigned e The Internal Auditron is a built in electronic accounting system that enables system usage to be tracked in machine memory by account number When enabled the user enters an account number prior to using the machine The numbers of prints made using the Account are tracked by internal counters which can be viewed on the User Interface screen by a user with Auditron Administrator privileges The Job Based Accounting DC440 432 430 425 this feature is an external device available on network configured machines only It uses an external accounting system server to store account data The Foreign Interface feature enables an external control device such as a coin operated device a bill acceptor a card reader or a network controlled tracking system NOTE Whe
53. a four page document and you want to make 10 copies of a document you will be making 10 copy sets paper used to add to the front or back of a copy set usually colored stock the settings used by the machine when the user does not specify settings retrieving documents from a remote fax machine at a delayed time programming that enables the machine to process a document at a later time a list of telephone numbers programmed into the machine for easy access special characters which apply only to Xerox machines that support fax mailboxes a copier that scans an image once to make one or many copies Page 15 3 Glossary Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Duplex Document Feeder Embedded Fax Facsimile Ethernet External Accounting Server EAS Factory Defaults File Server Forced 4800 DC426 420 Foreign Interface Device Frame Gray Scale Copying DC426 420 Page 15 4 the use of a keypad sequence tones to transmit to or poll from a remote mailbox referring to a document that contains an image on both sides of the page an assembly that automatically separates and feeds double sided documents from the input tray into the scanner a document that is transferred from one location to another via a telephone line a network transport technology commonly used to send data from one node to another a network server used to access account information settings which are incorporated int
54. are available on the open market from a variety of suppliers Contact your chosen supplier to arrange purchase and installation if required In view of the number of alternative suppliers available exhaustive testing of every available TA has not been undertaken by Xerox and therefore Xerox does not recommend any particular supplier Some products have however been tested by Xerox and have been found to be compatible with the DC440 432 430 425 fax The local Xerox representative will be able to supply details of these products Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 67 Page 4 68 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 5 Media Print Media Print allows a walk up user to print a file from a floppy disk Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 5 1 Media Print Using Media Print ASCII Text Postscript PCL TIFF Tagged Image File Format Quick Pathway and PDF Portable Document Format file formats can be gt Select Features on printed on the Keen the control panel Use the following steps to make prints using Media Print gt Select Media Print gt Make sure the disk is DOS formatted gt At the workstation select Print to File and select the options required for the job Print the files to the format required and copy them on to a floppy disk gt At the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 insert the disk into the floppy drive Floppy Drive
55. associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 13 About This Guide Laser Safety Page 1 14 equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the
56. be enabled or disabled for the Auditron see below gt Select Save Copy Fax Page 11 70 S Internal Auditron External Control Device S External Accounting e e Internal Auditron O enables disables Auditron for Copy jobs enables disables Auditron for Fax jobs NOTE The choice available will depend on the machine configuration for example if the machine does not have Fax capability then the Fax option will not be displayed Account Setups DC440 432 430 425 This setup is used to create delete or modify the accounts Depending on local requirements for tracking usage one account number can be assigned to each department or one account number assigned to each individual A maximum of 2000 accounts can be programmed into the machine Account numbers can contain between 4 and 16 digits Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Make selections as required see below for a description of Account Number each ken IT gt Select Save gt Select Internal Auditron QD Si Add Account Delete Account SS Modify Account Add Modify Accounts DC440 432 430 425 To add an account gt Select Add Account gt Enter the account number between 4 and 16 digits long using the screen keypad gt Select Save Add Account Delete Account Modify Account To modify an account gt Select the account number
57. configuration purchased Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 1 Product Overview Identifying the machine components The following pages provide information about the Document Centre components and control panel buttons as well as a description of the services and modes available Contact the local Xerox Representative for more information Document Glass Document under the document feeder Touch Feeder Screen Control Panel Left Tray Center Tray On Off Switch 426 420 Bypass Tray Left On Off Switch Duplex Front Paper Module Cover Trays 440 432 430 425 Page 2 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE The Document Centre 425 Digital Copier is also available as a single sided copier only The Document Feeder will be replaced by a Document Glass Cover and a maximum of 2 paper trays will be available Limited features will be available on this configuration Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 3 Product Overview Optional Components The graphic below shows some of the optional components available Depending on the Document Centre configuration the following may be already be available Finisher High Capacity Duplex Feeder HCF Module Paper Trays 3 Duplex module DC420 425 Makes two sided copies from one sided and or two sided documents Refer to page 3 14 for more information NOTE The Duplex Module is not an o
58. delete jobs from the Queue Media Size Conversion Used for the conversion of A4 A3 and letter ledger size paper for printing When enabled the Document Centre will check the status of the paper trays for the paper size required for printing H a tray is not configured for the required paper size the system will convert the job to print on a size that is available Contention Management These settings control the scan print and fax job priorities Copy priority is fixed at 3 and cannot be changed Print and Fax priorities can be adjusted however if Fax is not enabled the Fax priority will not apply Power Saver Sets the timings for the power saver feature on the Document Centre Printer Languages Contains PostScript PCL or TIFF setup options for the Document Centre Connectivity The following two options will be available Interfaces Used to modify the Port Configurations Protocols Use to modify the network protocols Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 9 Internet Services Feature Name Action Services Allows System Administrators to view or set parameters for stored templates set up repos itories template pools modify the default template and modify printer settings Internet Messaging DC440 432 430 425 The System Administrator uses this feature to set up default e mail features and functionality This feature will only be available
59. devices does not exceed 5 This product complies with safety standards and is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the US Department of Health and Human Services DHSS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This product does not emit hazardous laser radiation CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous exposure of laser light Since radiation emitted inside this product is completely confined within the protective housing and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of the user operation Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the US Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 1 1976 These regulations apply to laser products marketed in the United States The label on the machine indicates compliance with CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States This product contains laser warning labels These labels are intended for use by Xerox Service Representatives and are placed on or near panels or shields that require special tools for removal Do not remove any of the panels There are no operator serviceable areas inside these covers Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page
60. documents on the Document Glass and make a copy Replace folded or creased documents with the new copy Documents should be 16 321b substance 16 32 and 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 through 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 through 11 x 17 short edge feed The Document Feeder senses only standard sizes If the documents include non standard sizes copy them from the Document Glass If the sensor cannot detect the size it scans the entire glass area and prints on 8 1 2 x 11 inch paper Image loss might occur if the original is larger than 8 1 2 x11 inch NOTE If feeding Computer Fan Fold through the Document Feeder always remove the perforated feed edge first NOTE For information about copying mixed size originals using the document feeder please refer to page 3 23 For instructions on faxing mixed size originals using the document feeder refer to page 4 33 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 3 Copy gt v v v Before placing the documents into the document feeder remove all staples and paper clips Insert the documents neatly into the document feeder face up The first page should be on top with the headings towards the back or left of the machine Align the stack with the left and rear edges of the document feeder tray and position the guide to just touch the edge of the documents Check the green light on the top rear of the document fe
61. edges of the document gt Load fresh paper gt Check the humidity in the machine location Refer to Specifications on page 14 7 for environmental specifications Output is too light or too dark gt Load fresh paper gt Check the quality of the document gt Select Lighter or Darker on the touch screen gt Run off more prints until the copy quality has improved gt Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 9 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation Output is too light Vv v Vv If the Copy Print Cartridge is new the toner may not be dispensed Run off more prints until the copy quality has improved Set the Image Quality feature to a darker setting Uneven print v Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Blurred images v v v Load fresh paper Load the documents make a copy using the Auto selections collated to each output tray Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Missing characters v v Load fresh paper Reinstall the Copy Print Cartridge Gloss variations coining v v Check the quality of the documents If the document has large areas of solid density adjust the contrast Light copies when scanning glossy shiny or coated documents through the Document Feeder Use the Document Glass instead of the Document Feeder Ghosting
62. enter the Document Path and Volume o D Document Name or Document Folder This feature allows users to change the default Document Name For single page TIFF the Document Name defines the name of the folder where the image files are placed For Multipage TIFF PDF the Document Name defines the name of the image file stored NOTE If the setting f File Already Exists is set to Rename New File then this field is blank and any entries made will be ignored by the Document Centre tan Pine ee ct Sr EX ICE JOSS EI Fc YY Jos Je YT cy fea ye io Jes ies ea TE es fee fears oo cv es ee Vea is Page 6 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Login Name Password This feature is used to enter the login name and password of the filing location that the scanned image file will be stored in Login Password CC NOTE Use this feature if filing to a private filing location or if there is a need to change the login information for the scanned job If File Already Exists or Filing Policy This feature determines how the scanned file will be stored in the repository The default setting can be changed and applied to a scan job _j Rename New File A Overwrite Existing File BR Not Save Jar to Existing File Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 17 Network Scanning There are four options available Filing Policy Description Ren
63. for an individual mode select the ke ken Additional Counters ES Total Pages Printed required feature button NOTE If available select Additional Counters to access more mode buttons gt Select Exit gt To exit Machine Status select either Job Status or Features NOTE The Services button displays the number of copies prints made by the Xerox Service Representative working in the diagnostics mode Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 23 Product Overview System controls Language button changes the text to an alternative language when available Help button accesses additional information about a specific task Access button displays a pop up login window to access the Set up Tools used to adjust the defaults of the machine Clear All AC button resets the default settings and displays the first screen for the asterisk button used to indicate the dialling character Also used as a wildcard speed dial character current pathway Interrupt button temporarily interrupts a job to enable a priority job to be programmed e Pause Stop button used to temporarily stop a mn Start button starts Power cave Indicator Light identifies when the machine is in Power Save Auto Dial Pause button a job hash button used Clear button to indicate
64. gt Select the option required For Internal Auditron refer to Internal Auditron DC440 432 430 425 on page 11 69 For External Control Device refer to Foreign Interface Device on page 11 84 For External Accounting refer to Job Based Accounting optional Internal Auditron DC440 432 430 425 Internal Auditron setups on the DC 440 432 430 425 covers the Quick Pathway following topics Select 1 Auditron Enable Setups o set up the Auditron for one or Control Panel 2 Account Setups io set up the Auditron accounts delete Select button on the accounts and to set counter limits for each account Control Panel 3 Job Limit Policy to set up how the machine should Enter Auditron behave when an account reaches its account limit Administrator PIN 4 Account Summary reviews all the auditron accounts NOTE Ne F NOTE The default password is 22222 which may be used if Select Auditron PINs have not yet been assigned Setups Touch Internal S Auditron Auditron Enable Setups DC440 432 430 425 This setup enables the Auditron services to be enabled or disabled as required One or more services can be selected Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 69 Setups gt Access Auditron Setups NOTE The screen may show more options dependent on configuration gt Select Internal Auditron gt Select Auditron Enable Setups gt Select the services to
65. have been either successfully completed or canceled due to a fault or at the user s request This queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time When the queue reaches its capacity the oldest jobs are deleted to make room for new jobs Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 27 Network Scanning Destination Type Owner Status Scanned Filed Display Details Other Queues Page 6 28 Status Scanned Filed Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue this is the destination folder for the job displays the filing protocol used either TCP IP or Netware the name of the template owner as defined in the template file information about a job such as active or faulted the number of sheets scanned and the total number of pages already successfully stored at the remote location displays information on the jobs contained in the Completed Scan Jobs queue Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Scan Jobs Queue to manage the jobs displays additional information about a job in the Completed Scan Jobs Queue displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 7 E mail The E mail option will only be available on the DC440 432 430 425ifthe machine is connected to the network and the optional E mail and Network Scanning kit has been installed Using the E mail feature users are able to send scanned
66. information to help identify and manage error messages and problems It also contains troubleshooting and problem solving procedures to help quickly resolve the problem Refer to the information contained in this chapter to resolve any problem solving issues Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 1 Problem Solving Fault Clearance Procedure If a fault or problem occurs there are several ways in which the type of fault can be identified Once a fault or problem is identified establish the probable cause and apply the appropriate solution If a fault occurs refer to the screen messages and animated graphics and clear the fault in the order specified If the problem is not solved by following the screen messages and graphics refer to the problem solving tables on the following pages and apply the appropriate solution as described Also refer to the faults codes displayed in the Print Queue or Faults List in the Machine Status mode Refer to page 13 16 for an explanation of some of the fault codes and corresponding corrective actions Alternatively contact the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Key Operator for assistance Or switch the machine off and then on again Ensure that you follow the relevant power On Off instructions as described in Chapter 2 of this user guide CAUTION Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between repeated power OFF ON can result in damage to the DC440 432 430 426 42
67. jobs queue 20 embedded fax setups 37 embedded fax advanced features 24 fax standard features 7 energy star 16 envelope tray 8 loading 9 envelope tray paper supply specifications 5 Environmental Choice 16 environmental choice 16 environmental compliance 16 erase options copy 30 erase options e mail 12 guest and networkerase options network Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide scanning 13 erase copy 29 erase e mail 12 erase network scanning 13 expert image quality options copy 29 expert image quality setup 31 expert image quality copy 28 F failed fax files setup DC420 56 fault clearance procedure 2 fault codes and messages 16 fault codes table 16 fault override setup 19 faults machine status 21 fax 1 advanced features embedded fax 24 answer mode 36 build job 25 comment setup 42 communication mode 21 cover letter cover page 19 delayed start 22 delete mailbox contents 32 deleting a dial directory number 40 dial directory 16 group 40 individual 37 dial directory setup 37 mixed size originals DC420 33 more features 55 more features embedded fax 18 next destination 10 original size DC440 432 33 original type 8 poll remote fax 26 polling password button 29 print from mailbox 31 reports amp setups embedded fax 34 resolution 7 send priority 23 sending an embedded fax 1 select features 2 2 load the documents 3 3 dial the number 4 4 select
68. mail 19 print queue copy 53 queue tab internet services 6 print reports machine statusquick pathway conventions 4 21 R print setups 96 receive header print setup 65 printer setups 97 receive reductions setup 44 priority or print queue priorityrecycled paper 15 setup 14 recycling the copy print problem solving 1 cartridge 9 problem solving tables 4 redial management setup 59 problem solving internetreduce enlarge options copy services 28 17 product overview 1 reduce enlarge options programming a new comment network scanning 11 copy 40 reduce enlarge setup 26 properties features internetreduce enlarge copy 16 services 9 reduce enlarge network properties tab internet scanning 11 services 8 regulatory Information 10 protocol setups 96 removing the copy print public amp private repositories cartridge 5 internet services 15 replacing the copy print public and private templates cartridge 5 network scanning 5 report languages setup 15 public repository 1 2 3 4 setupreports amp setups embedded 95 fax 34 Q reports and counters machine queue status 21 completed fax jobs queueresend count setup 62 65 resolution setup 50 completed print job queueresolution fax 7 resolution server fax 48 completed print jobs 9 retrieving a copy job 52 completed scan jobs 27 ring volume setup 64 completed scan jobs es mail 20 safety notes 7 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide scan 1 original type 49 added
69. network tone is detected detection Or it can be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other services Local ID character check required as part of some international telephone numbers in place of 00 Local ID space character to improve readability For example adding spaces to a check telephone number as 1 234 5678 instead of 12345678 Telephone Or Select Gr 1 ou 2 Manual or On hook dialing is like using a telephone except a handset is not available When using the Telephone option a dial tone will be heard if the Line Monitor has been enabled by the Key Operator If the two telephone lines are available on the DC440 432 430 425 a Telephone option window will be displayed offering the following features Auto Select with this option the system will automatically select an available telephone line Line 1 is checked first if this is not available Line 2 is used Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 13 Page 4 14 Line 1 Line 2 Send Mask Data Receive Pulse to Tone select this option if Line 1 is required select this option if Line 2 is required NOTE Only 1 telephone line is available on the DC426 420 After selecting one of the above options or if only one telephone line is available select Send or Receive to tell the machine the type of job Enter the phone number and select Start NOTE When both fax lines a
70. of documents In Immediate Send Mode the confirmation page contains the information and page numbers as usual but it does not contain the reduced image of the first page NOTE If an error is detected a message is displayed on the touch screen Correct the error and proceed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Standard Features Embedded Fax Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select Fax Select the features available on the first Fax screen Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi Fine 200 x 200 dpi Fax The first Fax screen offers access to the features required to send a fax For more information about the features available refer to the following Resolution page 4 7 Original Type page 4 8 Sides Scanned page 4 9 Dialing page 4 10 NOTE For DC440 432 430 425 Embedded Fax and Server Fax can both be installed on the Document Centre but only one option can be enabled at one time The resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution yields better quality for photos A lower resolution reduces communication time apr More Advanced Reports amp All Features Features Setups Services Z Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing Newt Destination _ Keys recommended for text documents It requires less communication time but does not produce the b
71. of markings gt Place the marked copy on to the Document Glass gt Select Added Features and then Image Adjustment gt Select Edit gt Select Area Edit gt Select the option required and select Save gt Select Start Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide there is a choice of two edit options Area Edit or Page Edit there is a only one choice available Edit Area Edit DC440 432 430 425 COUR 1 Sided 2 Sided 1 2 2 2 VUL off Delete Inside Delete Outside E Centring Inversion cms sn apa Page 3 31 gt S QO Off Delete Inside Delete Outside Centring DC440 432 430 425 Inversion DC440 432 430 425 gt Load the document in the Document Feeder or place it on the Document Glass gt Select Added Features and then Image Adjustment gt Select Edit gt Select Page Edit gt Select the option you want to use and select Save gt Select Start Page 3 32 Area Edit options the feature is not available scans everything outside the orange lines and ignores everything inside The center area will be blank scans everything inside the orange lines and ignores everything outside The outside area will be blank centres the image from inside the marker area onto the output paper Areas outside the marker area are deleted changes all the black images within the mark
72. of the list to access a particular account select Search enter the account number and select Save this display provides the current value and limit of the counters for each service associated with the selected account resets the counters for the selected account to zero Select Confirm in the pop up window and Close to continue resets all the counters for ALL OF THE ACCOUNTS to zero Select Confirm in the pop up window and Close to continue downloads Auditron information to a PC However the download process requires additional external hardware in order to operate Contact the Xerox Sales representative for further information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 75 Setups Internal Auditron DC426 420 gt Access Auditron Setups gt Select Internal Auditron Page 11 76 Internal Auditron setups on the DC426 420 models cover the following topics 1 Service Access Setup to set up the Auditron for one or more services 2 Account Setup to set up the Auditron accounts delete accounts and to set counter limits for each account 3 Job Completion Setup to set up how the machine should behave when an account reaches its account limit NOTE Service Access Setup DC426 420 This setup enables the Auditron services to be enabled or disabled as required One or more services can be selected l Internal Auditron Xerox Document Centre 440 432 43
73. only available on the Copier Printer Copier Fax Printer On the DC440 432 430 425 each bin can hold approximately 100 sheets of 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 through 11 x 17 paper On the DC 426 420 each bin can hold approximately 70 sheets of 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 through 11 x 17 paper Refer to Tower Mailbox on page 8 5 for more information This two tiered shelf attaches to the right hand side of the machine The shelf is useful as a work area If the Convenience Shelf is fitted the Convenience Stapler can also be installed to manually staple documents or to staple output if the Finisher option is not fitted The stapler can handle a maximum of 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Refer to page 3 73 for more information NOTE The Convenience Shelf can be installed without the Convenience Stapler Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 5 Product Overview Multiple Fax Line DC440 432 Page 2 6 Editing Kit Fax 430 425 Hard Disk DC426 420 Allows editing tasks to be carried out on part or all of a document For more information refer to Edit optional on page 3 30 The Fax option includes a digital modem with automatic fallback capability supporting baud rates of 2 4 kbps to 14 4 kbps on the DC 426 420 and bit rates up to 33 6 kbps on the DC440 432 430 425 For more information refer to Fax on page 4 1 If the Fax option has been installed on the DC440 432 430 425 the
74. pause stop button 24 Using the help button 27 power save indicator lightwy 24 walkup screen setup 11 start button 24 warnings conventions 5 T Welcome Center 2 telephone fax 13 welcome centre 2 template and template list x network scanning 4 template management Xerox Welcome Center telephone number 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide
75. release the button on the top of the Finisher The green light next to the button is lit NOTE If a job is currently in process the light will flash wait until the job finishes Page 3 12 Stapled optional If the Finisher has been fitted the Stapled option will be available NOTE The Finisher is not available on the DC425 single sided configuration The Finisher can staple either 8 1 2 x 11 x 17 in sets of 2 to 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper either automatically or manually The staple cartridge holds 5000 staples NOTE Uncollated is not available for stapled copies Automatic Stapling using the Finisher Automatic stapling occurs when the stapled option has been selected on the touch screen Manual Stapling using the Finisher The Finisher stapler can also be used to staple documents manually Use the following steps to manually staple a set of documents Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Place the documents face down and long edge feed over the green rectangle with the left edge ofthe documents against the tab of the Staple Cartridge Door gt Slide the documents forward until you hear the click of the staple being inserted The staple is inserted in the upper left corner of the documents gt Remove the stapled set from the Finisher Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 13 Convenience Stapler optional The Conv
76. required gt Select Save Auto Exposure Lighter Darker Sharpness Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Adjusts the settings for the output UE Sharpness Auto Exposure Text C o Auto Lighter a Soft a Normal Normal H D Sy Ary A Lighter Darker Basic Image Quality Options Text used for scanning text solids line art and halftones Auto used to scan documents that contain halftones and mixed images Photo used for scanning continuous tone photographs and high quality halftones enhances documents that have colored backgrounds adjusts the density of copies and scanned images in the Text Auto and Photo mode enhances or decreases the sharpness level of fine lines and edges during Photo mode image processing Page 7 9 E mail Sides Imaged gt Select Sides Imaged gt Select the option required gt Select Save 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided Side 2 is Rotated Image Orientation Print Local Copy Page 7 10 This feature enables users to scan a single sided or double sided job Image Orientation Print Local Copy 1 Sided a et 2 Sided al Tet 2 Sided Side 2 is Je Rotated Sides Imaged Options scans the document as a single sided job This is the default setting on the machine scans the document as a head to head double sided job scans the document as a head to toe double sided job
77. stapler cartridge gt Slide the new cartridge into place gt Close the staple cartridge door gt If the Finisher tray does not rise automatically press and release the button on top of the Finisher to return the Finisher Tray to its operating position Page 12 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Convenience Stapler optional gt When the staple cartridge needs replacing or a staple jam occurs the indicator light on the right hand side of the Convenience Stapler will be lit A cartridge contains 5000 staples Indicator light gt Holding the sides of the Convenience Stapler door gently pull the door open towards you Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 15 Maintenance gt To remove the used cartridge hold the sides and slide the staple cartridge straight out of the stapler do not slide at an angle v Dispose of the used cartridge v Unpack the new cartridge v Before replacing the new cartridge check the position of the first staple The staple should be laying flat against the metal striking plate If the staple is not in this position or appears damaged manually remove the staple gt Slide the new cartridge into the stapler and close the stapler door Page 12 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 13 Problem Solving The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 has built in
78. submitted the job For walk up jobs the default name displayed is local For Embedded Fax jobs no owner name is displayed For Server Fax jobs an owner name will be displayed For LAN Fax jobs it will be the person who submitted the job Status information about the progress of a job such as printing scanning formatting Priority identifies the printing priority assigned to the job type Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage jobs When a toolbar button is selected a pop up window is displayed Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested action Promote moves a job ahead of all other jobs that have the same status and priority Only jobs with a Pending or Held status can be promoted H more than one job with the same priority is promoted the jobs will be arranged in first in first out order Jobs can be promoted at any time NOTE It is recommended that jobs are only promoted in an emergency Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 8 7 Release removes the selected job from memory and completes it as instructed Jobs are held due to missing resources for example embedded fax print sample set delayed print and secure print jobs Embedded Fax jobs can be labeled as Held due to incorrect paper size the document size required is not available Releasing a fax job forces the machine to print the fax on any available paper which might require a reduction or other modificatio
79. the page You typically turn over the page from the bottom edge the documents placed on the Document Glass or in the Document Feeder to be scanned paper used to separate sections or topics in a set of documents typically colored stock Internet Protocol An external accounting system installed via a floppy disk a pop up window that appears on the Fax touch screen and identifies information about the active job a designated user who sets Machine Copy and Fax defaults and maintains the machine the buttons on the control panel or the buttons in a pop up keypad window on the touch screen enables PC clients to send faxes via a Document Centre the image orientation on a sheet of paper Page 15 5 Glossary LDAP Long Document Long Edge Feed LEF Low Power Mode Mailbox Mailbox Polling Manual Answer Mode Mask Data Media Print Memory Node Non Standard Paper Open System Options Report Page 15 6 An acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A protocol that allows sharing or corporate phone book information a document that is longer than 23 584 2 millimeters typically called a log the long edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine first a Power Saver Mode that reduces power consumption when the machine is not in use a storage area in the machine s memory where fax documents are stored retrieves a document from the mailbox of a remote machine
80. the Print Queue gt Select Job Status on the control panel to display the KE E E E Print Queue Owner Status Priority gt The job will be displayed in the queue If there are no jobs in the queue the job may have already been processed NOTE Refer to Managing Copy Jobs on page 3 53 for more detailed information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 9 Copy Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select Copy Select the features available on the first Copy screen Output Page 3 10 Standard Features Copy Use the first Copy screen to select the standard features for a copy job For more information about the features available refer to the following Output page 3 10 Sides Imaged page 3 14 Reduce Enlarge page 3 16 Paper Supply page 3 18 Image Quality page 3 20 NOTE Only those features relevant to the machine configuration will be available Added SE All Services A EX Output ae d Reduce Enlarge Ge Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided 100 J Auto J Text J Uncollated J 1 gt 2 Sided J Auto 82x10 Auto J Stapled J 2 gt 2 Sided J BY 5 gt 84 14 J 6 x ND Photo J 2 gt 1 Sided J Bx N gt 1x17 Nx 17 Iess ess CRE GH Other Other J Other Paper Supply Depending on the machine configuration the Document Centre can be installed with a
81. the document the second side image is rotated 180 select this feature to identify the orientation of the image as it appears in the document handler before scanning NOTE The Document Feeder must be used when scanning 2 sided documents This feature prints a single sided copy of the scanned job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Reduce Enlarge Adjusts the magnification size of the stored image file gt Select Reduce Enlarge gt Select the options required gt Select Save Auto Y E Normal 100 50 200 4 Custom Reduce Enlarge Options Normal reduces enlarges the dimensions of the stored image file in equal proportions Custom reduces or enlarges the dimensions of the document in non equal proportions By setting the X and Y coordinates the length and width of the stored image file can be adjusted separately 100 sets the magnification to 100 size for size Auto reduces enlarges a document automatically to a size that fits the stored image size specified NOTE Auto Reduce Enlarge is only available when a document is placed on the Document Glass 50 200 enables settings to be adjusted in 1 increments NOTE On the DC440 432 430 425 133 is the maximum enlargement setting available with the 600 dpi option if HINT Selecting the numeric input area on the touch screen cas displays a pop up keypad which can be used to enter values Xerox Doc
82. the first job is retrieved by selecting Interrupt again The machine will finish printing the current set The machine will finish printing the current page Priority or Print Queue Priority Programs the machine to complete Print or Fax jobs ina specified order Number 3 is the highest priority and number 5 is the lowest priority Copy and Report jobs are always priority 3 they have job priority over all other jobs When print or fax is set as priority 4 the machine automatically sets the other feature as priority 5 Priority can only be changed for print and fax jobs Millimetres Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Additional Setups gt If necessary select Additional Setups gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows Additional Setups Touch Screen Contrast O Q 3 Customer Support Number acht e bi Xero e Q gt Make changes as required gt Select Save Report Languages Various language options can be made available for printed reports Please contact the Xerox representative for further information NOTE This option will not be available on Digital Copier configurations gt Select Report Languages gt Select the language to use for printed reports gt Select Close Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 15 Setups Touch Screen Contrast gt Select
83. to emphasize a word or phrase In addition references to other chapters and publications are displayed in Italic typeface For example Always follow safety procedures when operating the equipment Refer to Maintenance on page 12 1 for information about cleaning the Document Glass For more information about the network options available refer to the System Administrator Guide In addition to the step by step instructions available throughout this user guide a summary of the steps is contained in the Quick Pathway at the beginning of a chapter or section After becoming familiar with the procedures for a particular feature the Quick Pathway is a useful reminder of the steps required to access a particular feature Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Notes Hints Cautions Warnings Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Notes are statements that provide additional information For example NOTE If the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 does not include the Finisher and or High Capacity Feeder ignore the first step Hints help users perform a task For example HINT Select the X Y display areas to display a pop up keypad which can be used to enter and save the values Cautions are statements that suggest mechanical damage as a result of an action For example CAUTION When cleaning the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 do not use organic solvents or aerosol cleaners W
84. v v v v Check the quality of the documents If transparencies are used select Transparency on the touch screen The machine automatically adjusts the quality for transparencies Feed the document short edge feed Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Page 13 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Washout gt Check the quality of the documents gt If the image is lighter near the borders select a darker Image Quality setting on the touch screen gt Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Solid density variations gt Check the quality of the documents gt Select Lighter or Darker on the touch screen gt Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Image loss gt When copying a document from a larger paper size to a smaller size reduce the image to fit onto the smaller paper size gt If you are using 8 1 2 x 11 size paper reduce the document slightly copying 90 instead of 100 gt Select Auto Center on the touch screen Output does not reflect the selections made on the touch screen gt Select Save after each selection on the touch screen that contains a Save button The Finisher does not stack output correctly gt Check to see if the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Pages in the set are not stapled gt Check to see if the paper tray guides are locked into positi
85. 0 After approximately 14 000 copies prints the touch screen will display a message that it is time to order a new cartridge When this message appears make sure that a new cartridge is ordered Do not replace the cartridge at this point wait until the replace cartridge message appears CAUTION When ordering a new Copy Print Cartridge make sure the correct cartridge is ordered for the Document Centre by specifying which Document Centre model you have For assistance the product number will be displayed on the cartridge box Cartridges for the DC440 432 430 425 and the DC426 420 are not compatible WARNING Do not shake an empty cartridge or hold it close to you Some dry ink residue might accidentally spill Do not shake the empty Copy Print Cartridge and return it to the machine to extend its use Removing the old Copy Print Cartridge NOTE If the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 does not include the Finisher and or High Capacity Feeder ignore the first step Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 5 Maintenance gt Slide the Finisher and or High Capacity Feeder away from the machine gt To open the Duplex Module door release the lever located at the front of the Duplex Module Page 12 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Release the handle to open the Upper Left Door gt Pull the Left Front Cover open towards you Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420
86. 0 storing a copy job 50 dial directory fax 16 transparencies 34 dial pause button 24 transparency options 36 Dialing Fax 10 51 uncollated output 11 dialling digits reporting setup copy setups setups 25 43 copy print cartridge pjialling Fax 10 replacement 5 dialling fax 10 51 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide iii document feeder documents 2 document feeder specifications 4 document glass documents 4 document management fields internet services 22 document management fields network scanning 18 document name network scanning 16 document path volume network scanning 16 documentation information sources 6 duplex printing setup 45 E edge erase setup 33 edit DC420 copy 33 loading placing authenticated access 16 login guest access 14 login network authenticated access 15 manual e mail address 3 original size 8 options 8 output format 13 public address book 5 sides imaged 10 options 10 standard features 2 stored image settings 11 options 11 using the address books 4 email authentication mode 14 edit options DC420 copy 33 amp Mail scan queue 19 electrical specifications 7 frequency 7 power consumption 7 voltage 7 e mail 1 authentication logging off 18 basic image quality 9 options 9 changing the authentication service 17 erase 12 options 12 image adjustment 7 internal address book 6 login embedded e mail setups 99 e mail completed scan
87. 0 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Service Access Setup gt Make selections as required for each Service see below for a description of each gt Select Save Off No Auditron Auditron Without Account Limits Auditron With Account Limits ME Off No Auditron Auditron without LJ Account limits Copy Auditron with Account limits Fax enables disables Auditron for the service selected enables Auditron and allows unlimited usage for each account for the service selected enables Auditron and allows usage limits to be set for each account for the service selected NOTE Account Setup DC426 420 This setup is used to create delete or modify the accounts Depending on local requirements for tracking usage one account number can be assigned to each department or one account number assigned to each individual A maximum of 2000 accounts can be programmed into the machine Account numbers can contain between 4 and 16 digits Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 77 Setups gt Access Auditron Setups gt Select Internal Auditron Internal Auditron External Control Device S SEET gt Select Account Setup gt Make selections as required see below for a description of Count Limit each 3 L ojo bal II om gt Select Close eae a i bee s Account T Search v CH Delete Account C Add Account Add Account
88. 0 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 11 Setups gt Select Auto Clear gt Select On or Off gt If On is selected use the scroll buttons to set the timeout period gt Select Low Power gt Use the scroll buttons to set the timeout period Page 11 12 Auto Clear With the Auto Clearfeature enabled the machine returns to the default settings after the specified time E Auto Clear CH Off 16 300 seconds J Reeg i DW Power Save ae Low Power Low Power Mode becomes active after the specified time of machine non use When activated the Touch Screen is blank and the Power Saver light is on When the Control Panel or Touch Screen is selected or the Platen cover lifted the machine responds within 1 second All features are available within 30 seconds Auto Clear ea 5 240 minutes m Low Power 5 4 ei Power Save W NOTE If the Low Power timeout is set higher than the timeout for Power Save or Auto Off depending on system configuration the machine displays a message that Low Power cannot exceed Power Save or Auto Off Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Power Save Sleep Mode Auto Off Sleep gt Select Power Save or Auto Off gt Use the scroll buttons to select the desired timeout period gt Select Save Contention gt Select Contention gt Select any button to change the setting a description of eac
89. 0 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt If required use the scroll arrows to select an empty job in the Store Job list gt Select Store gt Using the keypad on the touch screen enter a name for the job gt If additional characters are required select More Characters f an incorrect entry is made select the lt button to backspace gt Select Save to store the name or Cancel to exit gt The job will appear in the Job List gt Select Close Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Job Name Delete J J zza It reg sie JH0000900000UE 9000009000 Gel 209090990008 Job Name two sided J fe Store Retrieve Delete Page 3 51 Copy To retrieve a stored job gt Select Added Features and then Job Assembly gt Select Stored Job Job Name gt Select the required job in the list and select Retrieve A confirmation message will be displayed in the message area Ur gt Select Close Review the programming or change any of the options before selecting Start Any changes will not be saved on completion of the job gt Load the documents and select Start To delete a stored job gt Select Added Features and then Job Assembly gt Select Stored Job gt Select the required job in the list then select Delete Stored job
90. 00 bps ECM is also used with this option The speed can also be selected manually The lower the speed the less chance errors will occur during transmission The speeds available are 14 4Kbps 12 0Kbps 9600 bps and 7200 bps Forced 4800 bps used when fax communications are susceptible to errors This mode is slower but less susceptible to errors NOTE In some regional areas the use of the Communication Mode feature is restricted Fax Mailboxes Fax Mailboxes are used to electronically store confidential incoming fax documents for retrieval and print at a convenient time Use this option to create assign modify and delete electronic fax mailboxes A maximum of 200 mailboxes are available gt Select Fax Mailboxes gt Select a mailbox in the list to select it Select the scroll buttons to move up and down the list R nl Edit K Print Mailbox List Delete Mailbox Mailbox List gt Follow the instructions below to delete edit or add a mailbox Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 53 Setups gt In the Mailbox List select a mailbox to select it To add a new mailbox select an empty mailbox gt Select Edit Mailbox gt Select Mailbox Password gt Use the keypad on the Control Panel to enter a four digit password 0000 9999 gt Select Save gt Select Mailbox Name gt Use the keypad on the Touch Screen to enter a name of up
91. 11 63 Co te Boa DES Line Use Restriction page 11 66 Enter the Key Operator PIN Select Fax Setups Select Fax Communication Setups Quick Pathway Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 57 Setups gt Select Fax Setups gt Select Fax Communication Setups Outgoing Fax Options gt Select Outgoing Fax Options gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows gt Make changes as required gt Select Save Page 11 58 Access Fax Communication Setups Fax Terminal Fax Communication Setups Setups NOTE Only those selections relevant to the product configuration will be available C Outgoing Fax Options CH Incoming Fax Options C Line Use Restriction Dialing Type This setting programs a tone or pulse dialing NOTE This feature is restricted in some areas Tone 10 PPS pulse per second for a rotary dial 20 PPS pulse per second for a rotary dial Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Dialing Type gt If necessary select Line 1 or Line 2 Dialing Type Line Monitor Line 1 gt Select the desired option zi J SS Dune gt Select Save __ Jens Time __ Josten Send Giz Tone Ri Redial Management J Resend Count Setups Pause Time This feature sets the amount of time for dial pauses gt Select Pause Time gt Select the scroll
92. 2 430 426 425 420 User Guide 3 Dial the number gt Using the numeric keypad 3 enter the fax number em E i em Machine Status 4 Select Start gt Select Start eis job enters the fax gt Remove the documents If enabled by the System Administrator a Confirmation Report will be printed at the machine to confirm that the fax has been scanned and filed successfully or if not the report will also display any errors that may have occurred Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 47 Fax Standard Features Server Fax Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select All Services Select Fax Select the features available on the first Fax screen Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi Fine 200 x 200 dpi Page 4 48 The first Fax screen offers access to the features required to send a fax For more information about the features available refer to the following Resolution page 4 48 Original Type page 4 49 Sides Scanned page 4 50 Dialing page 4 51 The resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution yields better quality for photos A lower resolution reduces communication time Fax More Fax Features Te Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing Dang Chast ES L Photo recommended for tex
93. 3 printer setups 97 priority or print setup queue Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide priority 14 protocol setups 96 public repository 1 2 3 4 95 receive header print 65 receive reduction 44 redial management 59 reduce enlarge 26 report languages 15 resend count 62 resolution 50 ring volume 64 secure fax receive 65 server fax 67 server fax setups 36 service access DC420 76 set user privileges 90 setup procedures 2 sides imaged 29 system administrator tools 3 setup time 10 timers 11 touch screen contrast 16 tower mailbox 98 transmission report 49 update all templates 95 walkup screen 11 setups local name 39 sialing characters Fax 53 sides imaged options e mail 10 sides imaged options network scanning 10 sides imaged setup 29 sides imaged copy 14 sides imaged e mail 10 sides imaged network scanning 10 sides scanned fax 9 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide sides scanned server fax 50 specifications 1 accessibility 2 bypass tray 5 centre tray 5 convenience stapler 6 copier speed DC420 3 DC432 3 DC440 3 DCxxx 3 first copy out time DC420 3 first copy out time DC440 432 3 copier speed paper tray 1 3 document feeder 4 envelope tray paper supply 5 finisher 6 hardware configuration 2 high capacity feeder 5 left tray 5 machine weight 2 paper supply 4 tower mailbox 7 warm up time 4 specifications for fax 8 speed dial fax 15 standa
94. 30 426 425 420 User Guide Powering Off When powering off the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 the machine remains on for approximately 10 seconds before the power is terminated The machine is storing files and preparing for the shutdown CAUTION Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between repeated power off on can result in damage to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 hard drive NOTE If the Printer option is installed and the power is turned off the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 will remain on for approximately 15 seconds before the power is terminated Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 9 Product Overview Power Save Modes Page 2 10 Power Save Indicator light to The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 has energy saver features which significantly reduce the power consumption during periods of inactivity The Power Save Indicator is a light located on the lower left portion of the control panel The Power Save feature operates in three modes Stand by Low Power Power Save Auto Off Sleep NOTE The behavior of these modes will depend on the configuration of the machine e A OT Helf H Features O Job Status P WE Machine Status mums CG C 18 C ASAIO Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Stand by Mode Prior to entering Low Power or Power Save Auto Off Sleep the machine is in Stand by Mode whenever it is not co
95. 430 426 425 420 User Guide Function Action Services Tab Radio Buttons Accesses the Job Submission or Stored Template service area page Apply new settings settings Applies changes Cancel Exits the page without updating Device Index Accesses Internet Services index for the Doc ument Centre Help Context sensitive Help is provided with Inter net Services Use the Help buttons and menus to access further information Print Fax Submission Submits a job for printing or faxing Refresh status now latest values jobs Update the page with the new information Restore Settings Returns the features to their last saved settings Restore Default Values Returns the features to their default values Browse Accesses the network or local directory paths The Browse buttons do not appear if Internet Explorer version 3 0 or less is being used Device Home Accesses the Document Centre home page Queue Refreshes the job listing Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 3 Internet Services Services Tab Job Submission Page 9 4 There are two options available within Services gt Job Submission is used to submit print ready jobs to the Document Centre gt Stored Templates contains the templates created in Internet Services for controlling Scan to File jobs NOTE Print files should not be larger than 6 MB
96. 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 39 Fax Maximum Store Width determines the size of the image stored in memory An 11 x 17 document can be stored as an 8 1 2 x 11 document to save memory This also depends on the ability of the recipient to receive large documents If the remote fax machine cannot receive documents larger than 8 1 2 x 11 save it as an 8 1 2 x 11 document Saving it as an 11 x 17 document uses additional memory needlessly In this case the document will be stored as an 8 1 2 x 11 document based on the requirements of the remote fax machine Deleting a number from the Dial Directory gt Select the number to be deleted gt Select Delete NOTE Numbers cannot be deleted out of order Always start from at the bottom of the list Group This feature enables the combination of specific individual names and numbers into a Group In order to be entered as a member in a Group the person must first be programmed as an individual in the Dial Directory When sending a fax to a group just use one group number and the machine scans the document once However each individual in the group receives the document Page 4 40 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax gt Following the same steps used to enter a nameinthe Individual Directory refer to Dial Directory Setup on ae page 4 37 enter a group Dial Group Number 01 10 name in the Group Dire
97. 5 420 hard drive If the problem persists or a message indicates that you should call for service please refer to the Call for Service procedure on page13 20 NOTE If Fax is enabled and a loss of power occurs the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 will print a Power Off Report when the machine is switched on This will show a list of the fax jobs lost during the power loss Page 13 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Clearing Jams Media jams happen for a variety of reasons Check the guidelines below to reduce the potential for jams in the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Use only recommended media Refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 and Specifications on page 14 1 for a list of recommended media types Store media at a temperature between 50 and 90 Fahrenheit 10 and 32 Celsius Protect unused media by storing it in its wrapper on a flat surface The orientation of the media in the paper tray must match the orientation of the documents Check the fill line in the tray to ensure the paper tray is not overloaded Do not use media that is torn wrinkled or folded To clear paper in any area of the machine locate the green dial or lever Turn the dial or lift the lever in the direction shown to remove paper When clearing Document Feeder jams always remove documents in the direction they are travelling for example away from the guides underneath the feeder NOTE If t
98. 65535 lines Connection Approvals EU EEA certified by Xerox to Directive 1999 5 EC Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide USA approved to FCC Pt 68 Canada approved to DOC CS 03 Other countries certified to national PTT standards Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 14 9 Specifications Page 14 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 15 Glossary Glossary This chapter contains a list of terms used in the User Guide Each term has a corresponding definition that reflects the meaning of the term as it is used in this Guide Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 15 1 Terms Defined Activity Report Annotation APS Auditron Auto Answer Mode Auto Exposure Auto Off Mode Baud Rates Bit Rates BPS Chain Dialing Collated Page 15 2 Use the definitions below to learn more about the meanings of terms used in this Guide a report that contains information about jobs sent and received a note or comment added to a document This feature adds the date page numbers and a comment to the document Auto Paper Select a tracking system which is built into the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 You can use auditron to track overall machine usage individual usage and usage of each feature separately A fax mode where the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is programmed to automatically answer calls an image quality setting which
99. Bx io SESCH eegen Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply o E 2 gt 1 Sided EIERE HES eem es B Page 3 7 Copy For a more detailed explanation of the standard features available on the touch screen please refer to the following pages Output page 3 10 Sides Imaged page 3 14 Reduce Enlarge page 3 16 Paper Supply page 3 18 Image Quality page 3 20 4 Enter the quantity DC440 432 430 425 On the DC440 432 430 425 the maximum copy quantity is 999 DC426 420 On the DC426 420 the maximum copy quantity is 250 gt Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies required The number entered is displayed in the top right hand corner of the Ce touch screen BRS To cancel an incorrect entry select C and enter the correct be en BEC e N Page 3 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 5 Select Start gt Select Start Each document is scanned once I only The size and orientation A are displayed in the upper left 7 2 hand corner of the touch Sy screen Job Status 3 D A If a resource problem or d C programming conflict prevents Said the job completing a message ns CG D will be displayed Follow the message to resolve the problem On completion remove the scanned documents from under the document feeder or from the document glass Start button 6 Identify the copy job in
100. Copy Print Cartridge error Check to see thatthe Copy Print Cartridge has the correct part number 0060 0062 A communication error occurred Check the connection to the telephone line and begin again 00A3 The job was stopped by selecting Clear 0220 A communication error occurred Check the connection to the telephone line and begin again 0221 The remote machine does not have the capability to be polled 0222 The remote machine is unable to receive a document Contact the remote operator and begin again Page 13 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Code Description and Corrective Action 0223 0226 A communication error occurred Check the telephone line select Forced 4800 and begin again 0227 Memory became full during communication Check the available memory Delete the job divide it into smaller jobs and begin again 022C 022D A communication error occurred Begin again 022E Check the password for the remote machine and begin again 0230 0233 A communication error occurred Check the available memory Verify that the dial directory code contains a DTMF code after a secure code and begin again 0250 0252 A communication error occurred Contact the remote operator check the telephone line and begin again 0254 Operator error The image size was changed to match the capability of the remote fax 0255 Operator error
101. Dialing Digits Reporting Qe Enter the telephone number for the telephone line connected to Line 1 of 2 ES 2 this machine then press Save LE SEE SE Local Name The Local Name is the name allocated to this particular machine For example it could indicate the location of the machine for example Copier West or be the Company name m Local ID T Lan Or Name Time ES Local Name T Long Document fe Company Logo T Dialing Digits Reporting Page 11 39 gt Select the second Local Name on the right of the screen gt Use the keypad on the Pen J Jee een Jem a Joes J Joes Je Ke Je screen to enter the Local Name of the 00440432437 LL OO OH OH OH 426 425 420 up to 20 elec ei 19000 characters including spaces gt Select Save Company Logo Company Logois used to identify the organization sending the fax in the header of the transmission report and in the cover letter for fax documents gt Select Company Loc REN ll D Ce pe ei Local Name J Long Document E Company Logo J Dialing Digits Reporting Page 11 40 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select the second Company Logo on the right of the screen ome rent cm sn gt Use the keypad on the screen to enter the Company MYQJ YO eal 05 Logo up to 30 characters CG CG a ES Col ul CO x CO LC 9 E including sp
102. Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 27 Secure Polling gt Load the document gt Enter the fax number for the remote machine Polling Passwords gt Select More Features DR Polling ke FPS CH gt Select Advanced Featu res E Secure Polling DW Print Documents gt Select Store for Polling No documents are stored for polling gt Select Polling Passwords and select the password from the list and select Close gt Select Start NOTE On the DC426 420 the Document Size window will be displayed Select the document size and then Start to complete the job NOTE If the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 s memory is full when trying to store a document for secure polling cancel the operation and try again later when more memory is available Page 4 28 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Polling Password gt If necessary use the up down scroll arrows to select a blank location in the list gt Use the pop up keypad to enter the fax ID number fax telephone number of the remote machine that will be retrieving the document gt Select Add Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Polling Password Button Fax If there are no passwords in the list use the following steps to create a password 2 3 02 565608 FE Co eg to 20 characters each then 2 a mess start elteltclt
103. Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 is connected to the network electronic jobs that require printing can be sent from a workstation directly to the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 8 1 Print Driver Features When selecting the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 as the printer the associated print screen will be displayed on the workstation Select Print from the toolbar in the software program to display the print screen The following pages describe the options that may be available on the print driver About tab provides the software version number and copyright information User Preferences tab selects Document Monitor to view status of print and fax jobs from a desktop and the selection of custom default paper sizes System Configuration tab tick the boxes next to the options that are installed on the machine Select paper sizes applicable to the Paper Trays Fonts lists the fonts available Paper Output tab selects options such as the job type and the number of copies The choices available are based on the options installed on the machine Use the scroll arrows to change the default settings To display the job type list use the arrow scroll button next to Normal Print the fax option is not connected only the print types will be available Available Job types Normal Print displays the print driver screen features Fax within Fax Setup are recipient fax phone boo
104. Fax Setups C Print Setups C Network Scanning Q Auditron Setups Port Setups set up the required port on the system Ethernet Parallel Port or Token Ring are the available options Protocol Setups Sets up the machine settings that correspond with the protocol being used For example NetBIOS NetBEUI AppleTalk NetWare TCP IP Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Printer Setups Sets up the following options on the machine Banner Sheet a cover sheet that is printed with the job Start Page specifies whether or not a startup page is automatically printed each time the machine is powered on Job Settings customizes the Number of Copies Collated Sets Sides Printed or Image Quality features Tray Settings used to assign the default Tray Priority enable or disable Auto Tray Switching and specify the Destination Tray NOTE This feature is not available on single tray configurations Media Settings specifies the default size type and colour of stock used for printing documents and specifies the default type and colour for printing Banner Sheets and Reports Also enables and disables the Media Colour Substitution for the Banner Sheet Hold Job Auto Delete used to enable or disable the buttons displayed on the Hold Job Auto Delete screen When enabled the System Administrator can specify a hold interval of between 1 and 120 hours after which time the job s will be aut
105. Fields and a change is required select either the Add Edit or Delete buttons located on the right hand side of the Document Management Fields box to create modify or delete an entry for the template Select Add New Field to save the entry Refer to Document Management Fields on page 9 22 for more information about this feature gt Go to the Document Centre and select Scan on the Touch Screen gt Select the template gt Load the documents and select Start For more information about Stored Templates refer to Template Management on page 9 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 5 Internet Services Queue Tab The Queue tab enables users to promote delete or release a job in the Document Centre print queue NOTE There is a time delay in refreshing the true status of deleted and promoted jobs Select Refresh Job after deleting or promoting a queued print job gt Select Queue The Document Centre queue information will be displayed gt Select Refresh Jobs to update the job list gt Select the required job and then select either Promote to process the job before processing other jobs in the queue NOTE Only jobs that are pending can be promoted Delete to remove the job from the print queue Release to allow the job to process NOTE As standard all users can promote and delete any print job Contact the System Administrator for further assistance
106. Multiple Fax Line kit can also be purchased This kit enables the use of two telephone lines for sending and receiving faxes For more information refer to Fax on page 4 1 The Digital Copier uses DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory for permanent and temporary storage The optional hard disk provides additional storage space for large or complex jobs Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Power ON OFF Powering On The 440 432 430 425 power switch is located on the top of the printer on the right hand side gt Locate the ON OFF switch gt Switch to I to turn the machine on Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 7 Ensure that the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is connected to a suitable power supply and that the power cord is fully plugged in to the electrical outlet For detailed technical information refer to Specifications on page 14 1 The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 takes approximately 3 1 2 minutes to power ON and complete a self test DC440 432 430 425 The DC440 432 430 425 digital copier will take approximately 55 seconds to power ON Product Overview DC426 420 On the DC426 420 the power switch is located on the right hand side of the printer gt Locate the ON OFF switch gt Switch to I to turn the machine on The DC426 420 digital copier will take approximately 59 seconds to power ON Page 2 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 4
107. N J PIN Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Delete PIN gt Use the search facility or scroll buttons to select the User PIN number to be deleted Setups DW Key OfUser PIN User gt Select Delete PIN gt Select Confirm Press Confirm to delete this user from the User List Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 91 Quick Pathway Select Access on the Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter the System Administrator PIN Select Additional Setups Select Service Access Control Guest Access Page 11 92 Service Access Control Authentication Mode DC440 432 430 425 Authentication is an optional feature available on a network connected DC440 432 430 425 Authentication restricts access to Server Fax Network Scanning and E mail Users will be required to enter a name and or password to access these screens NOTE If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the Auditron at the same time as Authentication the user will be logged off the other service at the same time as logging off from Authentication Additional C Access Rights Setups C Service Access Control E mail Setups NOTE Refer to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide for more information the System Administrator can configure a passcode number to protect certain features fro
108. NS Bomain Enter User Name Vicky AEN 0 Yen fem Jn Joe es Ja eE ES YEH CEs ake WC EE WE et FC ES EE WE E E YP E S ES E More NO ener Password ON 0 es foe J a Joes Yn es Joes Jn mn Ts je Ce Ye OC JH OC ES FE UE ES JES PC ER E SS ET WE E ET fe E Page 7 15 E mail Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be enabled together This allows users to select how they wish to login gt Select Network Authenticated Access and then select Enter KE ning Adjustment Format gt Enter the re uired lo in Network Authenticated Access i q g J Select the Enter button to type your login Type passcode using the keypad details name and password to the right then select Enter Bees OR Guest Access Provide a login passcode Enter gt Select Guest Access gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode gt Select Enter NOTE The From address cannot be changed if E mail has been accessed via the Authentication Mode Page 7 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Changing the Authentication Service If previously configured by the System Administrator users may select alternative authentication environments gt If necessary select Network Authenticated Access gt Select Enter User Name Vicky Enter The environment name
109. Name NETSCAN J Image Quality Auto Y HINT The Summary Box on the right hand side of the screen displays information about the template Refer to Original Size Auto Sides Imaged 1 Sided page 6 3 for more information Scan Resolution 300 x 300 dpi Page 6 5 Network Scanning If the template has been set up with a Private Repository gt Select Start A pop up window will be displayed asking for a password to be entered gt Select Output Format gt Select Login Name Password gt Select Password gt Enter the password to access the filing location gt Select Save twice gt Select Start to scan the job gt To check on the job progress review the Scan Queue in Job Status NOTE This will only show active or pending scan jobs Refer to Managing Scan Jobs on page 6 26 for more detailed information Page 6 6 Output Format Eye Network Image Scanning Adjustment Server IP Address Document Path CH 18210230 C fsv2 330 Login Name Password If File Already Exists All Services A Document Name NETSCAN Document Management gg as netscan Overwrite Existing File HINT If it is known that the template contains a private filing location it is possible to select that template and then enter the password before selecting Start Status Scanned Filed If requested the Document Centre will print a con
110. Page 3 38 Use this feature to add the date page numbers and acomment to the copy output Page Numberini Comments Date Enge ec Mn Position Off QO Position Off C Position Off Format Orientation Portrait Font Size Off Write Mode Transparent NOTE N Up 2 Up on the DC 426 420 Booklet Creation Bound Document Uncollated custom size documents and envelopes are not available with Annotation Date Page Numbering Comments SS Position Off C Position Off Q Position Off Format Orientation Portrait Font Size Off Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Date Page Numbering Comments Format DC440 432 430 425 Annotation options prints the current date based on the machine settings On the DC440 432 430 425 the date is added to the top or bottom of a page on the left right or center On the DC426 420 the date can be added to the left right or center of the top of a page only prints page numbers On the DC440 432 430 425 the page number is added to the top or bottom of a page on the left right or center On the DC426 420 page numbers can be added to the left right or center of the top of a page only prints a comment on the document On the DC440 432 430 425 the comment is added to the top or bottom of a page on the left right or center On the DC426 420 a comment can be added to the left right or center of the top of a page only Choose a programm
111. Print or Off to turn the feature off Hira nt is the facto ry J Transmission Report J Mailbox Report off Page 11 48 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Transmission Report Programs the machine to print the status of each transmission and displays a reduced image of the first page of the original document after each transmission is completed gt Select Transmission Report gt Select the option required Pe Alw ay s Print Pe Activity Report DW Multi Poll Reports automatically prints a report for each outgoing Transmision Report Jee Report fax Print on Error Only prints a report only when a transmission error occurs Off turns this feature off Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 49 Setups gt Select Mailbox Report gt Select the default option required gt Select Save Fax Panel Defaults gt Select Resolution gt Select the default option required a description of each follow Page 11 50 Mailbox Report Programs the machine to automatically print a report informing the mailbox owner each time a fax is received Broadcast and Activity Report CH Multi Poll Reports a Auto Print m Transmission Report m Mailbox Report m off gt Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on Fax Terminal Setups on page 11 37 gt Select Fax Panel Defaults Resolution Sets one of thr
112. SEF 500 sheets 20lb substance 20 paper Bypass Tray load SEF 50 sheets 20lb substance 20 paper High Capacity Feeder do not use in this tray Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 15 Paper and other media Media Use Specifications 8 1 2 x 11 Drilled Paper 3 4 and 7 ring binders Trays 1 2 3 4 load LEF with holes on the left for duplexing load with the holes on the right 500 sheets maximum 20Ib substance 20 paper Bypass Tray load LEF with the holes on the right for duplexing load with the holes on the left Load SEF with the holes facing the back of the machine for duplexing load with the holes facing the front of the machine 50 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper High Capacity Feeder load LEF with the holes on the right for duplexing load with the holes on the left 2000 sheets maximum 20Ib substance 20 paper Preprinted paper Letterhead Business communica tion mailings and advertising materials Trays 1 2 3 4 load SEF or LEF face up for duplexing load face down Bypass Tray load SEF or LEF face down for duplexing load face up High Capacity Feeder load LEF face down 2000 sheets maximum for duplexing load face up Start with a test run use paper that has preprinted materials from ultraviolet cured or oxidative inks whenever possible Page 10 16 Xerox Document Cent
113. Screen gt Use the numeric keypad to enter the account number gt Select Enter Make feature selections as v required to complete the job gt To exit the account select Clear All twice gt Select Machine Status on the control panel to the right of the touch screen gt Select Account Information gt The screen shown will be displayed with the count for Copy and or Fax jobs completed and the limit set for the account gt Select Exit to close the screen Page 2 26 The Auditron is a feature of the machine which automatically tracks usage If Auditron is enabled an account number must be entered For account number allocation or further information about the Auditron please contact the Key Operator Eng Ory Added Features Account Number Enter an Account Number using the S Enter keypad to your right Whilst still logged on use the following steps to review the status of the account Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Information Sources gt Select Help at the top left of the numeric keypad gt Select the feature you want more information about gt If available select Page to scroll through the options page by page System to gain help about the machine Index for a list of features available gt Select Close to exit the help screens In addition to the graphic and message display th
114. Select Machine Serial Number EECH More gt Use the keypad on the screen to enter the Machine Serial ET GI CH CG QJ CJ Gi Ce RS 0 2 number if necessary select Mee Ee to Se ESIESIESIESIERIRSIRS IS 0 GE 109909999099 gt Select Save HINT The Machine serial number is located inside the Left Front Cover of the machine under the Copy Print Cartridge w FS SEN U Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 17 Setups Xerox Supplies Number Supplies Tel Number The machine displays the Xerox supplies telephone number when Machine Status is selected NOTE The number entered here will also be displayed within the WebUI gt Select Xerox Supplies Number or Supplies Tel Number L gt Use the numeric keypad on the screen to enter the Xerox Supplies telephone number gt Select Save and Close Enter Xerox Supplies Number LJ ae LEE EELER WELL LE gt Select another Setup or select Exit to exit the setup screens Page 11 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fault Override When a fault occurs on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 the Touch Screen displays step by step instructions for the walkup user to clear the fault The instructions include contacting the Key Operator if the fault cannot be cleared In this instance the Key Operator can enter their PIN to access the Fault Overrid
115. Select On or Off as the default gt Select Save gt Select Communications Mode gt Select the default option required a description of each follows gt Select Save Page 11 52 Super G3 Forced 4800 DC426 420 Used when fax communications are susceptible to errors This mode is slower but less susceptible to errors T Resolution E Lighter Darker E off T Original Type Forced 4800 Jo Communication Mode DC440 432 430 425 This feature sets the default communication mode to be used for transmission to a remote fax machine CH Super G3 33 6 Kbps m Resolution Lj Lighter Darker G3 14 4 Kbps a Original Type fj Communication Mode e Forced 4800 bps automatically determines the communication mode to be used based on the maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine This mode minimizes the data transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Initial communication speed is 33 600 Bits Per Second bps The speed can also be selected manually The lower the speed the less chance errors will occur during transmission The Kilo Bits Per Second Kbps speeds available are 33 6 31 2 28 8 24 0 21 6 19 2 and 16 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide G3 like Super G3 this setting automatically determines the communication mode to be used based on the maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine but initial communication speed is 14 4
116. TE When loading documents long edge feed the annotation can only be printed at the top of the page Annotation is not available on the landscape edge of any document over 8 5x11inches in size Programming a new comment The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 can store up to 8 programmed messages up to 40 characters each on the DC440 432 430 425 and up to 20 characters each on the DC426 420 sm at cw sv Comment List Fe Off D A Top m Centre SC CH Ag ES All Pages J Page 1 J E J Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Use the pop up keypad to enter a new comment Select More Characters to use additional characters If an incorrect entry is made select the e button to backspace gt Select Save gt The comment will be displayed in the list ie er oe report Ad ETET OS DS JEA KS report A EISES IESSE ISS amp 299909090009 Sall EE Comment List SE ke KR Left report A 1 a B Je Ty Je kB hb Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 41 Copy Inserts gt Load the insert stock into the required paper tray gt Program the Tray Attributes window and select Save gt Select the features required gt Select Added Features and then Output Format gt Select Inserts gt Select the option required Page 3 42 This feature enables a different type of s
117. The Paper Supply button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Page 11 22 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Disabled Component Service Feature Disabled Feature Result Print Engine In Scan Setups Filing Proof Before Sending might be enabled Setups Proof Before in some Network Scanning templates Send The Proof Before Send job will be pending in the Print Queue until the print engine fault is cleared and printing is resumed Print Queue Print Network Print Controller jobs are temporarily removed from the Print Queue When the fault is cleared the machine attempts to recover the jobs Tower Mailbox In Print Setups Printer Setups Tray Settings Destination Tray Tower Mailbox Bins 1 10 The machine will not print Print jobs if the Tower Mailbox is disabled and the default is any Bin 1 10 Paper Tray 1 In Machine setups Paper Trays Default Tray The machine will not print Copy or Fax jobs if the disabled tray is the default tray The Paper Supply button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Trays Default Tray Paper Tray 2 In Machine Setups Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax Trays Default Tray jobs if the disabled tray is the default tray The Paper Supply button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Paper Tray 3 In Machine Setups Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax Trays Default Tray jobs if the disabled tray is
118. The resolution was changed to match the capability of the remote fax 0291 An error occurred during diagnostics Begin again 0294 An error occurred during diagnostics Begin again 02A1 02A3 A communication error occurred Begin again 02D1 02D5 A transmission error occurred Begin again 0510 0542 A communication error occurred Check the telephone line and the dial directory DTMF sequence and begin again Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 17 Problem Solving Code Description and Corrective Action 0545 056C Either a dial tone was not detected or the telephone circuit was busy Check the telephone line and begin again 056D The remote machine did not answer Contact the remote operator and begin again 056E The handset is off the hook Reset the handset and begin again 056F A communication error occurred Check the telephone line and begin again 0570 Check the ID of the remote machine and begin again 0573 057A Either the dial tone was not detected or the telephone circuit was busy Check the telephone line and begin again 057B A communication error occurred Begin again 057E 0589 Either the dial tone was not detected or the telephone circuit was busy Check the telephone line and begin again 05E0 0601 A communication error occurred Begin again Page 13 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User G
119. Touch Screen Contrast gt Use the up down arrows to select a contrast level between 1 and 254 Alternatively select the display window to change the setting using the pop up keypad The factory default is 127 gt Select Save Customer Support Number When Machine Status is selected the machine displays the Xerox customer support telephone number Typically the correct number is entered by a Xerox representative when the machine is first installed If it is not on the screen or if it is incorrect follow the instructions below to enter the correct number NOTE The number entered here will also be displayed within the WebUI gt Select Customer Support Number gt Use the numeric keypad on the screen to enter the Xerox J Customer Support telephone Co number LY E e Ge br i el EN BER OEL gt Select Save Un es e Page 11 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Paper Sizes gt Select Paper Sizes gt Select the preferred selection Cancel Save of paper SIZes Docurnent Feeder Platen Inch 1 Metric 1 A5 D 81x50 A6D gt Select Save LJ m A5 D 8X50 A5 D A4 D 81X10 A5 D ke 2 eB Metric 2 Aad Bax AAD 438 81X140 A4 D 82x40 1X70 A3 D Machine Serial Number The machine displays the machine serial number when Machine Status is selected This number is required when calling for customer support gt
120. User Guide Page 12 7 Maintenance gt Holding the coloured lever as shown slide the cartridge out until you can take hold of the handle on top of the cartridge gt Using the handle lift the cartridge out of the machine CAUTION Hold the empty Copy Print Cartridge away from you to avoid spilling any dry ink residue Page 12 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Recycling the Copy Print Cartridge The Print Copy Cartridge is designed to be re manufactured However refilling the cartridge is not recommended because critical components may need replacing To recycle used Print Copy Cartridges return them to Xerox in the original packaging Return labels are included with each new cartridge Maintenance Inserting the new Copy Print Cartridge gt Remove the new Copy Print Cartridge from the box Vigorously shake the cartridge from side to side before removing it from the bag gt Remove the paper strip protector Refer to the instructions with the packaging for more information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 9 gt Holding the cartridge by its handle slide it into the frame in the machine Let go of the handle as you slide the Copy Print Cartridge all the way to the back of the frame It must click into place gt Pull the coloured tab to remove the sealing tape from the cartridge It is located on the f
121. Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 604P00074 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Prepared by The Document Company Xerox GKLS European Operations Bessemer Road Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1HE ENGLAND 2003 by Xerox Corporation All rights reserved Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitations material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons screen displays looks etc Xerox The Document Company the digital X and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox Corporation Product names and trademarks of other companies are hereby acknowledged Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographical errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Printed in the United States of America Content 1 About This Guide dan anesideneerseenmese ense 1 1 el UE 1 3 le 1 3 Bracket text typeface issue 1 4 tate ee 1 4 Quick Pathway sean mme e adel Edel 1 4 NOLES nes rm nd net ner da TE ne re Pam nn radar ere nr de ren ee 1 5 FAIS 358 ee rt alu ne cae eeu a eee Pa ON ee ee eal fee 1 5 DE Dese Ieselen ett Kee Messier deeg egen E 1 5 VU 1 5 Related Information Gources ss insnnennnnnnnnnneees 1 6 Safety NOGS
122. a varies depending on the data being masked for remote terminal identification This character verifies that the correct number has been dialed which is very important if sending a confidential document A password is required before transmission to a remote machine For example 1234567S4567 where as 1234567 is the telephone number and 4567 after the S is the password instructs the machine to check for validity which is also known as Secure Send The machine does not dial any number after the S which is the ID number to pause regular fax dialing and start Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF procedures for the fax mailbox to wait for confirmation that the fax has changed from normal fax signalling to mailbox signalling to switch from pulse dialing to DTMF tone or touch tone dialing After switching from pulse to tone you cannot switch back to the original mode during the fax operation For example use pulse mode to make the connection and tone Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide mode to access a mailbox This is similar to a telephone response system Dial the number and wait for instructions LL After the call is answered and the greeting is heard users are prompted to select 1 or some other designated character if you are calling from a touch tone phone When the designated character is selected the system switches from pulse to tone ax Wait for network tone to suspend dialing until an expected
123. a ee tue 11 9 Walkup SGre ii Liege trahere annan utida eit dene ates ah tient EE 11 11 Ri 11 11 Cont ntion EE 11 13 ele te EE 11 14 Additional Setups stees geesde Sect elaine eee 11 15 Report Languages REENEN 11 15 Touch Screen Contrast cccccececeeeeescceeceeeeeeeseeeceaeeeseeeeescaeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeas 11 16 Customer Support Number ss 11 16 Paper SIZES EE 11 17 Machine Serial Number ss 11 17 Xerox Supplies Number Supplies Tel Number 11 18 Fault Override seess ced naraenia aei raaes e enideleuneedducnterieaedetcobeeudsceees 11 19 Accessing Fault Override sisieun aa eataa naaa Saaana Tapae ia ikea rena 11 19 Unavailable Features in 11 20 RRE TE 11 25 Access the Copy Getupe nenn nennnnnt 11 25 Reduch EE re EE 11 26 lut te Ren EE 11 28 lu TEE tete ete 11 29 SIGSS Tee EE 11 29 Expertilmage Quallity sinsi rasite rte iris ni ter Nes unie 11 31 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page vii Page viii Margin Shift DC440 432 430 425 oo eeee eee eeene seas sees seats teeeeeeeeeaeees 11 31 Erase DC440 432 430 425 iii 11 32 L 11 34 Access the FAX Setups street aa an aa terne 11 34 Server Fax Setups DC440 432 430 425 s eccceessseeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeseenenseesenens 11 36 Embedded Fax siamini ainiai asana items aE PEA NESNA 11 37 Fax Terminal Setuips 222 2uarrreiredestinene te dati rns iia aatri ei dre ie aeia 11 37 Access Fax T
124. aces gt Sel tIS ES HES HES HESS bt HU aha Ca CA Ci ai elect Save HINT Select Change Keyboard to display Wh 7 additional characters Delayed Start Time Users can scan a document and delay its transmission start time If they do not specify the delayed start time the machine uses the default delayed start time that is entered here gt Select Delayed Start Time e Local ID SCH Start Delayed Start Time Lie 21 00 E Local Name J Long Document ES Company Logo DW Dialing Digits Reporting Start Time on the right ce ME Start Time on the right of the screen Cancel save gt Use the scroll buttons on the screen to select the default transmission start time ES a oo A v Minutes y Hours gt Select Save to continue 00 23 00 59 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 41 Setups gt Select Long Document gt Select 600 mm or 3600 mm to enable scanning of long documents up to these lengths gt Select Save Page 11 42 Long Document DC440 432 430 425 This feature allows the Key Operator to set up the machine to scan and send fax documents that are longer than 16 5 J Local ID J ar Start T 600 mm J Local Name E Long Document a 3600 mm J Company Logo J Dialing Digits Reporting Lj Local ID Peya Du LJ Local Name Long Document 3600 mm PS Company Logo J Dialing Digits Reporting Xe
125. ading preparation 2 ordering supplies 2 paper sizes setup 17 orientation conventions 3 paper storing and handling 12 orientation sides imaged copypaper supply options copy 19 15 paper supply specifications 4 original input DC420 copy 22paper supply status machine original input size server fax status 20 56 paper supply copy 18 original size DC440 432 faxpaper tray setups 8 33 paperport internet services 25 original size options pause stop button 24 copy 23 pause time setup 59 original size options e mail 8 pcl setups 97 original size options networkplacing documents document scanning 8 glass 4 original size options server faxpoll remote fax fax 26 56 polling password button fax 29 original size copy 22 port setup 96 original size e mail 8 postscript setups 97 original size network scanningpower on off 7 power save indicator light 24 original type setup 51 power save mode 11 original type fax 8 power save mode setup 13 original type server fax 49 power save modes 10 other media 13 changing the default time output defaults setup 29 settings 12 output format copy 34 low power 11 output format e mail 13 power save 11 output format network stand by 11 scanning 14 powering off 9 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide ix powering on 7 fax queue 63 print 1 print 6 print documents store fax 29 print queue copy 53 print from mailbox fax 31 scan 26 print queue print jobs 6 scan e
126. ading the files Page 5 4 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 6 Network Scanning The Network Scanning option will be available on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 if the machine is connected to the network and the optional E mail and Network Scanning kit sometimes known as Scan to File kit has been installed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 1 Network Scanning Network Scanning Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel if necessary select AII Services Select Network Scanning Select the Template required Page 6 2 Network Scanning enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original document The image file is placed into a network filing location specified in a Template A template stores the user s preferred network scanning options NOTE Typical network scanning options include the filing destination of the image file whether the document should be scanned lighter or darker or if the document was double sided When a template is selected at the Document Centre the stored scanning setups are loaded If a document is scanned using this template then the image file created will be processed according to the settings configured in the template The settings programmed for the selected template can be temporarily amended using the features available on the touch screen The Network Scanning screen displays the templates a
127. ailable for use Users can access and modify templates within Stored Templates Refer to the following for information on creating copying and modifying a template NOTE The default template cannot be deleted Creating a new template gt Select Stored Templates gt Select New The Default Template s settings are used to create the new template gt Enter the template details gt Select a service for the template NOTE A File or Fax Service must be defined for a template gt Select Apply The new template appears in the left frame and is created with the specified name gt Select Scan and or Fax and or File as appropriate in the template and apply any additional changes to the template which relate to the selected service and select Apply New Settings NOTE Use the Aad Edit or Delete buttons to create modify or delete a Document Management Field entry Modifying a template gt Select Stored Templates gt Select the required template gt Select the service area to modify and make changes gt Select Apply New Settings Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 23 Internet Services Scan to File Page 9 24 gt To return the template to its last saved values select Restore Settings NOTE Use the Add Edit or Delete buttons to create modify or delete a Document Management Field entry Copying a template gt Select Stored Templates
128. al 10 bins Capacity DC440 432 430 425 100 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper in each bin DC426 420 70 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper in each bin Paper Sizes 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 LEF and 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weights 16 24lb substance 16 24 Delivery face down NOTE Envelopes should not be fed to the Finisher Electrical Specifications Frequency 50 60 HZ Electrical Voltage 102 140VAC Power Consumption Maximum average 1 38 KVA 115VAC Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 14 7 Specifications Specifications for the Embedded Fax Feature Page 14 8 Fax Transmission Speed DC440 432 430 425 33 6 Kbps with automatic fallback 14 4Kbps and 4800bps operator selectable DC426 420 14 4 Kbps standard with automatic fallback 4800bps operator selectable Page Transmission Time ITU No 1 document DC440 432 430 425 33 6 Kbps standard less than 4 seconds DC426 420 14 4 Kbps standard less than 7 seconds Telephone Line Requirements Standard public analogue switched telephone line or equivalent Compatibility Super G3 ECM G3 Xerox proprietary mode NSF Resolution Capability 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi Resolution Conversion Available for sending and receiving smooth on receiving Image Compression MH MR MMR Long Document Send Receive Send 3600 mm maximum length Receive
129. al striking plate If the staple is not in this position or appears damaged manually remove the staple Refit the staple cartridge and try again if the problem persists replace the staple cartridge Paper jams gt Check to see if the paper is loaded correctly Flip the paper over in the paper tray gt Check to see if the paper tray guides are locked into position gt Do not use media that is torn wrinkled or folded gt Load fresh paper Paper curls gt Check to see if the paper is loaded correctly Load paper in Paper Trays 1 2 3 and 4 seam side up gt Load paper in the High Capacity Feeder and Bypass Tray seam side down gt Load non standard media in the Bypass Tray gt Refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 for procedures Envelope Jams gt Turn the envelopes so that the gummed edge is the trail edge With an external control device connected such as a coin operated device the machine displays a Ready to copy message but users cannot log in gt Check the external control device to ensure that it is properly connected and powered on Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 13 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation Can t store a document for secure polling due to memory full gt Delete any jobs stored in the Failed Fax queue DC426 420 only gt Cancel the operation and try again later when additional m
130. ame New File the Document Centre automatically names documents being scanned Do Not Save the Document Centre names documents being scanned using a value defined by the user If a file or folder with the same name already exists at the filing location it will not be overwritten by the device and the scan job is aborted Overwrite Existing the Document Centre names File documents being scanned using a value defined by the user If a file or folder with the same name already exists then that file is overwritten Append to Existing be Document Centre will add the File scanned images to files that already exist in the filing location This feature can only be used with a Single Page Tiff file format NOTE Values are defined by the user using the Document Name option Document Management Fields DC440 432 430 425 This feature is only available when a template contains Document Management Fields information Templates containing Document Management Fields information are created using Internet Services or CentreWare Scan Services For more information refer to Document Management Fields on page 9 22 Page 6 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE If Document Management Fields information has not been entered into a template then the button will not be selectable at the Document Centre Document Management Fields allow information to be stored with the scanned files This in
131. ange the paper and its attributes or load more of the same paper Please refer to page 3 78 for more information about programming the paper tray attributes Preparing paper for loading Before loading paper into the paper trays fan the edges This procedure separates any sheets of paper that are stuck together and reduces the possibility of paper jams Ws HINT To avoid unnecessary paper jams and misfeeds do not remove paper from its packaging until required Loading the paper trays Depending on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 configuration up to four paper trays will be available NOTE If the machine is processing a job do not open the active paper tray Page 10 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Pull out the paper tray towards you gt The Tray Attributes window will be displayed on the touch screen HINT To avoid jams and misfeeds do not load paper on top of paper that may still be in the tray Remove the paper and reload it on top of the new stock loaded Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 3 Paper and other media gt If required move the paper tray guides to accommodate the new paper size To adjust the side guide lift the guide and slide the guide to its new position If not positioned correctly the guide will not slot into place To release the rear guide push down on the tab and slide the guide to its new position The tab will
132. appear confirming that the download SAL E Is IN progress Press close to return to account summary screen N ke gt On completion a confirmation 7 message will be displayed gt Select Close Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 81 Setups Quick Pathway Select Access CE onthe Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter Auditron Administrator PIN see NOTE Select Auditron Setups Select External Accounting Page 11 82 Job Based Accounting optional DC440 432 430 425 Job Based Accounting is an optional external accounting system installed via a floppy disc and set up by the System Administrator It can be used for Copy Embedded Fax LanFax Server Fax E mail Print and Scan jobs NOTE The set of data collected for accounting will vary for each job type in the system The Document Centre must be connected to the network for this feature to operate as the network is used to communicate job logging data to an External Accounting System EAS Once the installation is complete the EAS is given the IP address of the machine Data is then collected by the EAS Server at regular intervals The EAS must have Internet access The External Accounting System uses the Internet Address for example the IP address to gain access to the Document Centre When a job is submitted to the machine users are prompted to type in a User ID and an Account ID A r
133. ard setting for normal documents and fine and superfine settings for documents with more detail Service Advertising Protocol sensing or reading a paper document and connecting the optical image of the document to an electronic image of the document a single page scan from the Document Glass or a single or multiple page scan from the Document Feeder a walk up fax service which uses a Third Party Fax Server the short edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine first Simple Mail Transfer Protocol a condition of reduced power consumption while the machine is not performing a transaction a form of abbreviated dialling that enables the dialing of a number by entering a three digit code Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Stabilizer Feet attachments that replace the casters under the machine and keep it from moving Stand by Mode a condition of reduced power consumption while the machine is not performing a transaction Store for Polling to store a document in memory until it is retrieved by a remote fax machine System Administrator a designated user who sets and maintains the network settings on the machine TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TIFF Tagged Image File Format Transmission Report a report that confirms the status of a fax document Transmit to send Uncollated output programming whereas the specified number of copies for each page in a copy se
134. arnings are statements that alert users to the possibility of personal damage For example WARNING This equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket outlet Page 1 5 About This Guide Related Information Sources Page 1 6 Information available for the Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 consists of This User Guide The On line Help system The Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 ST System Administration Guide The Xerox CentreWare Customer Documentation NOTE Please note that the screens shown in this user guide apply to a fully configured DC440 432 430 426 425 420 and therefore may not exactly represent the configuration being used Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Safety Notes Your Xerox product and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency approval and compliance to established environmental standards Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your product The safety testing and performance of this product have been verified using Xerox materials only Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or supplied with the product This WARNING Mark alerts users to the possibility of personal injury This WARNING Mark alerts users to heated surfaces D WARNING This product must be connect
135. assigned to five users Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 87 Setups PIN Dec deent ege Owner 1234 S S 2345 e 3456 ke 5678 if S POE e vi vi vi PIN 1234 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup Tools and access only the Auditron and Access Setup features This user cannot access any other Setups PIN 2345 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup Tools and access the Machine Setups Copy Setups and Fax Setups This user cannot access any other Setups PIN 3456 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup Tools and access the Print Setups E mail Setups and the Network Scanning Setups This user cannot access any other Setup buttons PIN 5678 enables its assigned user to access Machine Setups Copy Setups Fax Setups Access Rights setups and Auditron Setups on the DC426 420 PIN 4567 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup Tools and access ALL of the Setups Page 11 88 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Assign Privileges gt Select Access on the Control Panel 3 Cancei Enter Services Output pply fe Quality Please enter your password A pop up window will be Collated J using the keypad to your right displayed on the Touch Screen EECH Gr Photo J EN 2 gt 1Sided_ Bx N gt Nx x 17 CLIIL fo SSeS SS gt Select on the Contr
136. at NOTE The current date is displayed on fax documents confirmation pages and activity reports It is also displayed when users select Annotation and Date for their copies Page 11 9 Setups Time gt Select Time Setup OG Setup Q Setup gt Select the preferred display format 12 or 24 Hour for EE night would either be displayed as 11 or 23 hours e Hour Se a Minutes a gt Use the scroll buttons to 5 be ei ei 24 Hour select the current time in hours and minutes gt Select Save and Close NOTE The current time is displayed on fax documents confirmation pages and activity reports It is also displayed when users select Annotation and Time for their copies Page 11 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Walkup Screen To change the default display for the Touch Screen gt Select Walkup Screen gt Select the preferred default Fo e L Je ke screen gt Select Save i J Queue Je Queue ke Print The screen selected will be displayed when the machine is switched ON when NOTE The buttons available will depend on the machine programming or job time out configuration occurs or when Clear All is selected Timers gt Select Timers gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows gt Make changes as required gt Select Save to continue Xerox Document Centre 44
137. atures If necessary select All Services Select Fax Select the features required Sending a Fax using Embedded Fax 1 Select Features gt If necessary select Features to display the feature modes gt Select Clear All once to cancel any previous screen programming selections Selecting Clear All twice clears all the programming pathways and returns the machine to its default status Features Button Power Saver Clear All Page 4 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt If necessary select All Services gt Select Fax gt The first Fax screen will be displayed Sides Scanned Resolution Original Type Dialing Telephone Dial Directo 2 Load the documents gt Load documents face up in to the Document Feeder or face down on the Document Glass Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 3 gt Using the numeric keypad enter the fax number If a character is normally dialed before the telephone number for example 9 for an outside line a pause might need to be entered after this character select Dial Pause on the control panel before continuing to enter the fax number NOTE Dial Pause is displayed as a dash When using manual dialling the Dial Pause character is not required instead wait for the outside line dial tone before proceeding gt Select Start The Fax Job Monitor pop up win
138. ax received jobs Jobs are considered complete when they are successfully printed or terminated at the user s request or due to a fault The queue contains the last 50 completed print jobs Jobs are maintained on a first in first out basis and organized in order of completion kal Item Name Owner Status Time Completed Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue the number in sequence for the job the name of the document or the remote terminal the type of job for example Copy the creator of the job For print jobs this is the person who submitted the job information about the progress of the completed job This includes completed jobs faulted jobs jobs canceled by users and jobs canceled by the system the time and date when the job entered the queue Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Print Jobs Queue to manage jobs displays additional information about the jobs in the queue displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 8 9 Page 8 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 9 Internet Services Internet Services utilizes the embedded Web User Interface which enables communication between the HTTP server and the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Internet Services can be used in conjunction with scanning e mailing printing and faxing NOTE This feature must be installed and set up b
139. be accessed during a system fault when the confirmation window is displayed or when the Key Operator Tools is accessed on the touch screen gt Select Machine Status on the control panel The screen shown will be automatically Machine Paper Supply Faults Reports amp 3 Information Status Counters displayed SS Customer Support Number Software Revision Levels A i Ut S323R GM FX0534 gt To exit Machine Status D He Serial h DC Sys XCE245 GIMI FX0534 select Job Status or ES MF Sys Gamm HCF Not Installed Featu res at any time IT Sys XC1306 DSS Not Installed ESS S3_8_1s Boot 070 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 19 Product Overview Page 2 20 Machine Information Displays the Customer Support Number Machine Serial Number and Software levels Machine Paper Information Status Supply Faults Reports amp Counters Customer Support Number Software Revision Levels Ut 323R GIMO FX0534 n DC Sys XCE245 GaMt FX0534 EE ME Sys Damm HCF Not Installed IT Sys XC1306 DSS Not Installed ESS S3_8_ Boot 070 Paper Supply Status Displays the status of each paper tray the bypass tray and the optional high capacity feeder It also displays the size type and color of the media in each tray and whether or not embedded fax printing is enabled for each tray if embedded fax is installed The Key Operator sets the defaults and enables specific paper f
140. ble each document is single sided each document is double sided each document is double sided with each second side rotated by 180 the first page of the set of documents is single sided and the rest of the document is double sided Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Dialing Send List Fax Four dialling options are available within the Server Fax screen Features Services 7 Sides Scanned Resolution Original Type Dialing Standard J Text J Send List J Keypad J Fine J Auto J Dialing Characters J Phonebook Send List Phonebook The Send List and Phonebook features enable users to create a list of fax recipient numbers for a current fax job or alternatively store regularly used numbers on the machine Send List and Phonebook features share the same touch screen Whichever feature is selected the same touch screen will be displayed Fax numbers can be added to both areas NOTE When moving through the fax default screen the fax number entered will remain displayed A description of each option follows this is a list of numbers to which the fax will be sent Entries displayed will be for the current fax job Once the job has been faxed the entries will be automatically deleted from the list The list can contain upto 50 entries NOTE Once an entry is added to the Send List an asterisk will appear in the Send List button on the main Server Fax screen Xerox D
141. buttons to select a pause time in seco nd S e Dialing Type J Line Monitor A i Pause Time J Batch Send En g E Y 0 255 Redial Management Resend Count Redial Management Redial Count sets the number of times the machine will automatically attempt a redial if a connection cannot be made Redial Interval sets the time intervals in minutes between redials NOTE This feature is restricted in some areas Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 59 gt Select Redial Management gt Select Redial Count gt Select the scroll buttons to select the number of redial attempts gt Select Save gt Select Redial Interval gt Select the scroll buttons to select the elapsed time in minutes between redials gt Select Save Page 11 60 oe J Dialing Type CH Line Monitor Q Count _j Pause Time J Batch Send E Redial Management PR Resend Count CL Fame Interval 3 Minutes redials 0 9 ae 1 255 minutes 4 QU Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Line Monitor gt Select Line Monitor gt Select On to enable this feature or Off to switch this feature off gt Select Save to continue Line Monitor Volume gt If Line Monitor is set to On select Line Monitor Volume gt Select the volume setting required gt Select Save Line Monitor audibly mo
142. cate directly with other nodes a report that lists the jobs that are in memory and the amount of available memory enhance photographs retrieves a document from a remote machine the image orientation on a sheet of paper PS files a page description language from Adobe Systems Inc that is used extensively on MACs and PCs as well as workstations mini computers and main frame energy saver modes that significantly reduce the power consumption during periods of inactivity a report that lists the status of the printer options installed options PCL5 options PostScript options and connectivity options a media misfeeds when the machine is printing a document Page 15 7 Glossary Protocol Pulse to Tone Queue First Touch Screen Repository Remote Terminal Resolution SAP Scan Segment Server Fax 440 432 430 425 Short Edge Feed SEF SMTP Sleep Mode Speed Dialing Page 15 8 the rules that control the transmitting and receiving of data switching between dialling types This is useful when you need pulse mode to connect and tone mode to access a mailbox or another feature a temporary storage unit for jobs waiting to be processed the first touch screen displayed for each feature It contains the settings used most often stores electronic documents the terminal at the other end of the telephone line the amount of space between each line the machine scans Select the stand
143. ce Enlarge is selected the machine does not rotate the image to match the orientation of the paper If Auto Custom Reduce Enlarge is selected the machine does rotate the image Paper Supply The media loaded in the paper trays determines the sizes displayed in the Paper Supply selection on the touch screen For example if transparencies are loaded a picture of a transparency is displayed When a tray is opened or paper is loaded in to the Bypass Tray a pop up window Tray Attributes will be displayed on the touch screen When changing the type or color of stock in the tray the tray must be programmed to match the media being loaded If the type or color of stock is not being changed select Confirm to close the window NOTE For information about loading paper refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 Page 3 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Open the paper tray The tray attributes window is displayed gt Load the tray Tray 1 was loaded with Change Type gt If the paper type or colour Other C Color Standard has been changed select White Change Type or Colour and programme the new settings Select Save gt Select Confirm to carry on with the job NOTE The size and orientation is determined for all trays except the Bypass Tray Paper Supply options Auto accepts the default setting standard white paper for the paper supply If a specific pa
144. ce the image to fit et Receive Reduction J Paper Attributes ni Trim A3 et Page Margin CH Output Selection LJ Reduce A3 to Fit Je Printing ai A3 gt Nx 7 gt Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on Fax Terminal Setups on page 11 37 gt Select Fax Report Options Activity Report Programs the machine to automatically print a report of phone line activity Broadcast and IS Activity Report LJ Multi Poll Reports J Auto Print T Transmission Report J Mailbox Report On Demand Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 47 Auto Print prints an Activity Report when the number of outgoing and incoming calls reaches 50 Only calls that were not printed on the last report are included On Demand prints an Activity Report only when it is manually selected Only calls that were not printed on the last report are included Broadcast and Multi Poll Reports Programs the machine to print a report of each broadcast send and multi polling operation to multiple remote machines When a fax is sent to one fax number the machine prints a Transmission Report When a fax is sent to or polled from a group of numbers the machine prints one Broadcast and Multi Poll Report which lists all of the numbers in the group gt Select Broadcast and Multi Poll Reports age Cancel gt Select Auto Print to have d A Broadcast and this report print automatically Jeun Report aan pee __ Jan
145. ch s Start fax mailbox signaling 1 Depending on the setup of the telephone and communication 5 Pulse to tone switch lines some or all of the following characters will need to be used Wait for mailbox confirmation Page 4 11 Dial pause Mask data Password check switch S Start fax mailbox signalling Wait for mailbox confirmation Pulse to tone switch Page 4 12 to pause between numbers This pause gives the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 time to switch from an inside line to an outside line during automatic dialing This is similar to using a telephone except dial pause is automatically entered when 9 or another designated number is dialed to get an outside line On the Document Centre Dial Pause is displayed as a dash for example 9 1234567 For additional pause time add multiple pauses However do not add pauses unless a delay is expected If using charge code numbers enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code numbers to ensure that the telephone line is ready to accept the numbers to protect confidential information Select the forward slash key before entering confidential numbers After entering the last confidential number select the slash key again to turn off Mask Data The characters or numbers entered between the slash characters are displayed as asterisks Select Enter after each entry The placement of the masked dat
146. ctory 03 04 gt Choose a group number 5 ei name the group and save sine gt From the Dial Directory select the individual names and numbers that are to be included in the group After each name and number select Add to add it to the group To delete a group select the group number and select Delete v v v The machine automatically selects the last number Numbers cannot be deleted out of order always start with the last number on the list NOTE Up to 10 groups can be programmed and stored Each group can contain a maximum of 20 destinations Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 41 To send a Group Fax gt Select Dial Directory gt Use the up and down keys to locate the directory number required Groups will be at 01 E the bottom of the list Dial Group Number 01 10 2 A EL gt Enter 01 to go to the top of the list Vv gt Select the required number details appear in the display window gt Select Next to add the selection to the current dial list gt To enter additional locations repeat steps 5 and 6 Comment Setup Comments are used in the To and From lines on a cover page Refer to Cover Letter Cover Page on page 4 19 on how to add a comment The DC440 432 430 425 can store up to 50 comments in the Comments List The DC 426 420 can store up to 34 comments gt Select Comme
147. cument Feeder Copy 2 Up Booklet Creation Sides Imaged 2 gt 1 or 2 gt 2 or Mixed Size Originals in the DADF Document Feeder Fax Sides Scanned Document Feeder Network Scanning Sides Imaged Duplex Module Copy Booklet Creation Sides Imaged 1 gt 2 or 2 gt 2 Duplex Module Copy Setups Sides The machine will not print copy jobs if Imaged 1 gt 2 Sided or Duplex is disabled and Sides Imaged 222 Sided 1 gt 2or 2 gt 2are the default settings The Sides Imaged button will not be displayed on the Touch Screen Duplex Module In Fax Setups Embedded The machine will not print fax jobs if the Fax if both Fax options Duplex Module is disabled and if the are enabled Terminal default settings are Duplex Printing All 2 Setups Fax Printing Sided or 1 2 2 Options Duplex Printing All 2 Sided and 1 2 2 Duplex Module In Print Setups Printer The machine will not print jobs if the Setups Job Settings Duplex Module is disabled and the Sides Printed Duplex default is Sides Printed Duplex Duplex Module Network Double sided printing Page 11 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Service e Disabled Component Feature Disabled Feature Result Editing Kit Copy Editing Finisher In Fax Setups Embedded The machine will not print Fax jobs if the Fax if both Fax options Finisher is disabled and the default is are enabled Fax Stapled Termina
148. d Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Type tandard Hole Punched ransparenc reprinted abels ecycled Ac Page 3 35 Copy Off Blank Dividers No Dividers Printed Dividers Copy Sets Transparency options the feature is not available places a blank sheet of paper between each transparency prints transparencies with no dividers Copy Sets can still be selected an additional paper copy is automatically inserted after each transparency prints additional paper sets of the transparencies Select Copy Sets and use the number keypad to enter the quantity required HINT If a paper tray has been loaded and the tray attributes have been programmed it is not necessary to assign a tray for transparencies The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 automatically detects the tray that contains the transparencies NOTE To avoid overheated or distorted transparencies do not copy onto transparencies without selecting Transparencies first N Up 2 Up DC426 420 Page 3 36 DC440 432 430 425 DC426 420 This feature prints two or four independent documents on to one sheet of paper The DC440 432 430 425 reduces enlarges the images as needed to print them either in landscape or portrait orientation on one page based on the paper supply selected this feature is available as 2 Up It enables two independent documents to be printed side by side on to one sheet of paper It reduces enlarg
149. d LEF paper and removable strip up with the glued edge as lead edge Always feed paperbacked transparencies long edge feed only with the glued edge as the feed edge No special instructions for clear transparencies Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 19 Paper and other media Page 10 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 11 Setups The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is designed to enable machine and feature default settings to be customized to meet local requirements This chapter contains an explanation and step by step instructions for customizing the various defaults available on the machine plus general information regarding the procedures This chapter is for the Owner Key Operator and System Administrator of the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 1 Setups Setup Procedures Key Operator Tools Page 11 2 Machine Setups Fault Override Copy Setups During manufacture certain settings for features and functions of the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 are programmed into the machine Once the machine is installed the Setup Tools can be used to change these settings to suit the user s environment To change the settings a user enters a PIN Personal Identification Number Depending on the access rights assigned to the PIN any or all of the following tools can be accessed to allow the various settings to be changed
150. d choose a path from one of the pre defined repository servers gt Select the template at the Document Centre control panel gt Scan the document at the Document Centre The document is scanned to the public repository To scan to a private repository gt Create a scan template for Scan and File Services Refer to Template Operations on page 9 23 for information on creating a template gt Select a template and change the path to a private repository by selecting Private as the Repository Type in the template s File Service and entering a new path gt Select the template at the Document Centre control panel Enter the private repository password in Added Features Filing Setups Login Name Password gt Scan the document at the Document Centre The document is scanned to the private repository Retrieving a Scanned Document using PaperPort NOTE This feature is intended for use with CentreWare 4 1SP2 or earlier It is not used when scanning using CentreWare 5 1 or later Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 25 Internet Services Page 9 26 To edit an electronic file first scan the document then retrieve itin a TIFF editing application such as PaperPort gt Create a scan template for Scan and File Services Refer to Template Operations on page 9 23 for information on creating a template Or gt Select Scan to PaperPort in the Internet Services template gt
151. de you will find that some terms are used interchangeably gt Paperis synonymous with media gt Document is synonymous with original gt Page is synonymous with sheet gt Document Centre DC 440 432 430 426 425 420 is synonymous with the machine Orientation Orientation is used to mean the direction of images on the page When the image is upright the paper or other media can be one of two ways Long Edge Feed LEF When observed from the front of the machine paper or Portrait originals with the long edges to the left and right of the paper tray or document feeder Short Edge Feed SEF When observed from the front of the machine paper or Landscape originals with the short edges to the left and right of the paper tray or document feeder Use the diagram below for more information LEF Orientation SEF Orientation PL GZ q B EES Paper feed direction Paper feed direction Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 3 About This Guide Bracket text typeface Italic typeface Quick Pathway Quick Pathway gt Select Access on the Control Panel gt Enter Key Operator PIN gt Select Machine Setups Page 1 4 The Bracket Text typeface is used to emphasize the selection of a feature mode or button For example gt Select Image Quality gt Apply the new settings gt Select Save The Italic typeface is used
152. de to be used based on the maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine This mode minimizes data transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Initial communication speed will be 33 600 Bits Per Second bps selects the communication mode based on the maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine Initial communication speed will be 14 400 bps ECM is also used with this option used in areas of low quality communication or when experiencing telephone noise or when fax communications are susceptible to errors To minimize errors set the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 to run at a communication mode of 4800 This mode is slower but it is less susceptible to errors In some regional areas the use of the Communication Mode Forced 4800 bps feature is restricted Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 21 Fax Delayed Start gt Load the document gt Select More Features gt Select Delayed Start gt Select ON the Delayed Start screen will be displayed gt Use the up down scroll arrows to indicate the hour and minutes when you would like the fax to be transmitted gt Select Save and then Start Page 4 22 Delayed Start is mainly used to transmit faxes during off peak hours when telephone charges are lower or when sending to another country time zone Use Delayed Start to transmit a document to a single destination or use a broadcast send or polling operation
153. delayed print and secure print jobs Embedded Fax jobs can be labeled as Held due to incorrect paper size the paper size required is not available Releasing a fax job forces the machine to print the fax on any available paper which might require a reduction or other modification It is held in memory until the problem is resolved A password is required to release a Secure Print job Each user sets his or her password s at the network user application driver Different passwords for each job or one password for all jobs can be set Other jobs in the queue bypass this job and are completed After a problem has been resolved or when the held job is ready to print select the job and select Release gt S Q Delete deletes the selected job from the Print Queue After the job is deleted all of the resources allocated to that job are also released In an open system no access control any job can be deleted by any user If an active job is deleted it stops printing immediately and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs Queue where it is listed as Canceled by User If a pending job is deleted it is removed from the Print Queue and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs Queue where it is listed as a canceled job NOTE Only the owner of a job should delete the job Details displays additional programming information about the jobs in the Print Queue For held jobs the Details screen includes information about how to release th
154. ding and delay the number of pages in a job For queued fax send and broadcast send jobs the number of pages for transmission that are stored in memory is displayed in the Pages column For queued fax poll and multi poll jobs the Pages column is empty The generated cover page is not counted as one of the transmitted pages however it is counted as one of the received pages When a cover page is scanned in instead of using the system generated cover page the machine counts the page as a transmitted page It counts all scanned pages Use the toolbar across the top of the Fax Queue to manage jobs When a toolbar button is selected a pop up window is displayed select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested action Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Promote allows a pending fax send job to be promoted to the top ofthe queue Once promoted the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 manages the prioritization of the jobs in the queue Fax Delete deletes the selected active or pending job A pop up window enables confirmation or cancellation of the request If an active job is deleted communication stops immediately The job is removed from the Fax Queue and placed in the Completed Fax Queue with an error code in the Status column If a pending job is deleted it is removed from the Fax Queue and not listed in any other queue Details displays additional information about the jobs in the Fax Queue A job can be stopped fro
155. dow will be displayed This shows information about the fax job The Document Centre scans the images and places them in its memory Page 4 4 3 Dial the number Features Zeg Job Status ver Saver Dial Pause button 4 Select Start ut T 2323 Job Type Fax Send Scanning page 1 Job Status Storing to memory Available Memory 99 Standar Fine For more details press Job Status button Super Fine Photo J Telephone J Dial Director Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax The fax job enters the fax queue gt Remove the documents O CH O Print Queue Fax Queue Scan Queue If enabled the machine will print a transmission report once the e Completed Print Jobs CH Completed Fax Jobs Completed Scan Jobs fax has been sent For more information about the job select Job Status NOTE Refer to Managing Fax Jobs on page 4 63 for more detailed information To help identify the status when sending an embedded fax the following symbols will appear in the right hand corner of the touch screen Fax Status D Document in Memory the machine contains one or more copy or fax jobs in memory Fax Error a communication error has occurred Select Job Status and check the Fax Queue for details The symbol disappears when any key on the control panel or any area on the touch screen is selected a Faxon Line the machine has made a c
156. ds before incoming calls are automatically answered NOTE This feature is restricted in some areas gt Select Auto Answer Delay gt Select the scroll buttons to ay set the time delay before calls are answered E Auto Answer Delay J Receive Header Print E Ring Volume J Secure Fax Receive H y seconds 0 15 Junk Fax Prevention Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 63 Setups gt Select Ring Volume gt Select High Normal or Low as the default ring volume gt Select Junk Fax Prevention gt Select On to enable this feature and Off to switch this feature off gt Select Save Page 11 64 Ring Volume J Auto Answer Delay m Receive Header Print IS High Gi Ring Volume J Secure Fax Receive J Normal Ej Junk Fax Prevention 9 Low Junk Fax Prevention This feature programs the machine to only accept incoming fax documents from remote machines whose Local ID numbers are programmed into the Dial Directory All other fax documents are rejected thereby ensuring junk fax documents such as advertisements and circulars are not received DW Auto Answer Delay DW Receive Header Print ES Off J Ring Volume CH Secure Fax Receive De ES Junk Fax Prevention Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Receive Header Print gt Select On or Off gt Select Secure Fax Receive gt Se
157. e vt cm sm Off Auto Centre Image Shift options the feature is not available automatically shifts the image to the center of the paper copies the image to a specific area Unless the new location is specified the output will be displayed on the page just as it is on the document Side 1 the default setting shifts the image to the left or right up or down for the first page of the document being copied The image can be shifted up to 2 in Page 3 27 gt S QO Expert Image Quality gt Select the features required gt Load the document Ensure that the documents are in the same orientation as the media loaded in the paper trays gt Select Added Features gt Select Expert Image Quality and the option required gt Select Save and Save again gt Enter the quantity and select Start Page 3 28 Side 2 shifts the image to the left or right up or down for the second page of the document being copied The image can be shifted up to 2 in Independent Use this to set different image placement options for side 2 of the documents Mirror Side 1 sets the image shift selections for side 2 the same as those entered for side 1 Use this feature when documents require more than the basic image quality adjustment Sharpness Auto Exposure Off in Soft J Sharp On A Normal ES Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Sharpnes
158. e 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 3 Network Scanning Templates and template list Page 6 4 Refresh List Refresh Template The template list contains an ordered list of all the templates available to the Document Centre There are two types of template that can be displayed CentreWare Internet Services templates template names preceded with a character CentreWare Scan Services templates template names not preceded with a character NOTE Refer to the CentreWare Customer Documentation for more information on CentreWare Scan Services templates The template default will be automatically selected on entering Network Scanning for the first time If more than 6 templates are available the scroll buttons are used to move down through the list HINT Only one template can be selected at a time It is possible that the templates displayed may not be the latest version or that the list does not contain newly created templates Selecting one of the following options will update the template list updates all the templates in the list Templates that have been deleted or added using CentreWare Scan Services will be removed from or added to the list refreshes the selected template NOTE CentreWare Scan Services stores templates in a remote location called a template pool Access to this template pool is required by the Document Centre when updating either the template list or an individual tem
159. e Bypass Tray can be used for a variety of different media stock Refer to the table on page 10 13 for more information The Bypass Tray is located on the left hand side of the machine A tray extension to accommodate larger paper is provided After loading media stock in the Bypass Tray the Change Attributes pop up window will be displayed on the touch screen Reprogram the paper type size or color to match the stock loaded NOTE To reduce unnecessary fuser and paper feed jams it is important that the paper size color and type programmed in the Change Attributes window for the Bypass Tray is identical to the paper stock loaded HINT To ensure excellent performance when loading stock of 32lbs or heavier it is recommended that the Heavyweight option is selected as the Type in the Tray Attributes screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Bypass Tray with the Left Tray gt Following the copier labels load the paper neatly into the bypass tray ensuring that the paper stack is registered to the front right hand corner Take care not to fill the tray above the fill line gt Slide the rear guide towards the paper until it is just touching the edge of the stack Bypass Tray with the High Capacity Tray and Finisher gt Slide the High Capacity Feeder and Finisher unit away from the machine gt Load the Bypass Tray as described on the previous page gt Slide the unit back to the machi
160. e Page 6 23 Network Scanning Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be enabled together This allows users to select how they wish to login gt Select Network Authenticated Access and Eve Network Image Output All then select Enter Scanning Adjustment Format Services j j Network Authenticated A gt Enter the required login E Saleet the enter BEN te ten your oui Type passcode using the keypad details name and password to the right then select Enter Guest Ac 5 OR E Provide SE passcode amp Enter gt Select Guest Access gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode gt Select Enter Changing the Authentication Service If previously configured by the System Administrator users may select alternative authentication environments gt If necessary select Network Authenticated Access Change More gt Select Enter Fleer Name Vicky DS Poman me The environment name that a w 2 LJ 1 Ly ER Li ER Le LO 2 appears in the Change button will vary depending on the GJ LG LA 2 La 3 LU Lo LI Ei E o network EN Ee GA a IER E SS ee EZ The example shown refers to a DNS Domain gt Select Change DNS Domain Page 6 24 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select the required network environment gt Select Enter to continue
161. e Page 8 5 Managing Print Jobs Quick Pathway Select Job Status on the control panel The Print Queue will be displayed To display the Completed Print Job Queue select Other Queues and Completed Print Jobs Queue Print Queue Job management can be carried out on each individual job contained within the Print Queue The Print Queue maintains all pending and active jobs that are to be printed Paused jobs are considered active jobs These include network print jobs Fax print jobs report jobs and copy jobs The Print Queue can hold approximately 500 jobs at one time Jobs are placed in the queue according to job priority and type When full the queue will not accept any more jobs As space becomes available new jobs will enter the queue Owner Status Priority Job Page 8 6 a number is assigned to identify each job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Name the name of the job For copy jobs the default name oca is used For network print jobs and reports the name ofthe file is Ee used For faxes received the name is typically the remote fax ID number NOTE Depending on the Third Party Server different entries might be displayed for Server Fax jobs Type the type of job For example Copy Fax Print or Proof Print NOTE Server Fax print jobs will be reported as Fax Receive Owner _ if this feature is enabled the column will show the name of the person who
162. e fax is to be printed The Page Margin setting affects the bottom of the page It avoids image loss if users are printing onto a smaller size paper J Receive Reduction gi Paper Attributes E Page Margin E Output Selection a o e Jee Printing eech y Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Duplex Printing gt Make selections as required see below All 1 Sided is the factory default For DC426 425 420 duplex options also select either Portrait or Landscape output and whether printing should be Head to Head or Head to Toe All 1 Sided All 2 Sided 1 2 2 Duplex Printing This feature sets the default 2 sided printing setting for incoming fax documents and reports NOTE Duplex Printing features will depend on product configuration DW Receive Reduction PS Paper Attributes KS All 1 Sided PN Page Margin P Output Selection a 2 Sided E Duplex Printing J122 prints fax documents and reports single sided prints fax documents and reports double sided prints fax documents with the first page single sided and the rest of the pages double sided Reports are printed all double sided Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 45 Setups Paper Attributes Programs the default types colors and sizes of paper on which fax documents and reports can be printed gt Select Paper Attributes gt Select the buttons on the
163. e following information sources are designed to provide guidance and information when making copies Using the Help button The Help button on the control panel provides additional information about a specific task The Help system also provides context sensitive help specific information to the task being carried out The help screens can be reviewed in Features Job Status and Machine Status modes Use to choose where and how to deliver your copies If you do not choose an Output selection Centre Tray or Left Tray your copies will be delivered collated to the Centre Tray NOTE Jobs cannot be programmed when using the Help screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 27 Product Overview Page 2 28 Labels Located on the machine at point of need throughout the machine labels provide guidance when for example clearing paper jams or loading documents User Documentation There are 2 books available which fully describe the operation of the system User Guide All operational maintenance and machine setup procedures DC440 432 430 426 425 420ST System Administration Guide Information on Network installation and setup procedures Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 3 Copy This chapter contains information about the Copy screen and the features available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 1
164. e job Other Queues displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 55 Completed Print Jobs Queue Item Name Type Owner Status Time completed Details Other Queues Page 3 56 Maintains completed print jobs including Server Fax received jobs Jobs are considered complete when they are successfully printed or terminated due to user request or a fault The queue contains the last 50 completed print jobs Jobs are maintained on a first in first out basis and organized in order of completion Owner Status Time Completed Te the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue the number in sequence for the job the name of the document or the remote terminal the type of job for example Copy the creator of the job For print jobs this is the person who submitted the job information about the progress of the completed job This includes completed jobs faulted jobs jobs canceled by users and jobs canceled by the system the time and date when the job entered the queue Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Print Jobs Queue to manage jobs displays additional information about the jobs in the queue displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 4 Fax Fax Sending and receiving a facsimile fax is an optional feature on the Document Centre 440 432 430
165. e number keypad to enter a Key Operator PIN gt Select Enter in the pop up window Services Image Please enter your password Quality Collated using the keypad to your right Uncollated D A Lee Deenen Cor Corr Output Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 25 Setups gt Select Copy Setups Reduce Enlarge gt Select Reduce Enlarge gt Select Defaults gt Use the arrow buttons to select the default magnification setting The default magnification will automatically be selected when the machine is switched ON when programming or job timeout occurs or when Clear Allis selected Page 11 26 Q Machine Setups E Print Setups CH Network Scanning Q Auditron Setups 0 Copy Setups ES Fax Setups Reduce Enlarge i Image Quality f Output Sides Image gee une on Additional Setups d Defaults E Defaults T Normal ES Custom 100 ER Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Normal gt Use the arrow buttons to select a value for each magnification preset gt Select Custom gt Use the scroll buttons to select a value for X and Y gt Select Save Normal When users select Normal in the Reduce Enlarge column on the Touch Screen a selection of preset sizes is displayed The default value of these presets can be customized to
166. e of a copy job For more information about the features available refer to the following Transparencies page 3 34 N Up 2 Up DC426 420 page 3 36 Annotation page 3 38 Inserts page 3 42 Booklet Creation page 3 44 Covers DC440 432 430 425 page 3 45 Eng Copy Image Output Job All Adjustment Format Assembly Services A Transparencies N Up Annotation Off HEIN Off Date Off BE 4 J Page Numbering Off Comments Off Inserts kl ation Covers F off off off This feature enables copying on to transparency stock placement of dividers between the pages and making hard copy sets for handouts NOTE For information about loading transparency stock please refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Load the documents in the document feeder gt Make the required feature selections Transparency Set Off Es gt Select Output Format J vides gt Select Transparencies M wm El Following the instructions CC ES Copy Sets Output Off select the option required gt Load the transparency stock gt Programme Change Tray Attributes Select Type Use the up ME down scroll arrows to display the transparency Sri option Select Transparency and select Save e Select Color then Clear and then Save gt Select Start NOTE A maximum quantity of 1 can be selecte
167. e screen and disable the faulty component After the component is disabled all features will be available except those that require the disabled component Use Fault Override only if all other attempts to clear the fault have failed Entering Fault Override Mode might require action to disable the faulted component delete the faulted job or both depending on the type of job and fault NOTE Use caution when deleting a remote job it may not be possible to re create or resubmit the job Accessing Fault Override To access Fault Override Mode a fault screen must currently be displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select Access C7 gt Select and enter a P N Personal identification Number with Key Operator access rights see NOTE below gt Select Confirm to delete the current job and or disable the faulty component NOTE The default password 22222 may be used if PINs have not been assigned Refer to Access Rights on page 11 86 for more information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 19 Setups Unavailable Features Some types of jobs will not print if the disabled component is required for a default setup In this case the machine displays a prompt to check the setups The following table contains details about specific features that are unavailable when a component is disabled Service e Disabled Component Feat re Disabled Feature Result Do
168. e three modes available on the machine Features Job Status Machine Status The mode buttons access the screens which enable users to program features monitor the status of jobs on the machine and obtain general information about the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 NOTE The features available will depend on the machine configuration it DOO Features C Features button 55 Em a Job Status Job Status button GE B Machine Status Machine Status button 5 oc Page 2 16 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Features button Select this button to access the feature screens Each screen is accessed by a tab The first screen for each tabbed feature contains all the basic settings required for each feature For example the first Copy screen enables programming to make a copy and the first Fax screen to send a fax The additional screens provide settings to allow further programming selections Machines connected to the network are able to support two types of walk up fax Embedded Fax or Server Fax Both fax services can be installed on the machine BUT only one can be enabled at any one time Whichever service is enabled the Fax feature tab will be available for selection Please refer to Fax on page 4 1 for more information gt Select Features on the control panel to display the Ge z default screen gga 2 Emon LES roe L Sie
169. ect Side 1 or Side 2 to change the setting or Off to disable this feature gt If Side 2 shift is selected select Independent and the settings or Mirror to mirror the side 1 settings gt Select Save Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 31 Setups Erase DC440 432 430 425 gt If necessary select Additional Setups gt Select Erase gt Select Border Erase or Edge Erase to change the settings a description of each follows or select Off to turn this feature off gt Make changes as required gt Select Save gt Select Border Erase gt Use the scroll buttons to set the default measurement for Border Erase between 0 and 2 in gt Select Save Page 11 32 Programs the default settings for the Edge Erase and Border Erase features The factory default is off for all the erase features with the erase values set to 0 inches a Border Erase a Edge Erase Border Erase DC440 432 430 425 vite cf Se Off O 2in aL Border Erase Edge Erase Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Edge Erase DC440 432 430 425 gt Select Edge Erase gt Use the scroll buttons to set the default Edge Erase Top Bottom Left Right o 0 50 mm settings 0 50mm O 50mm 0 50mm Co Co Co Lo gt Select Save je Se 4 A a a gt Select Close to exit Copy Erase
170. ed comment or create one by selecting Enter Refer to the instructions on page 3 40 for creating a comment there are three options available Each option is available with any one of the annotations orientation informs the machine of the orientation landscape or portrait of the document The machine then uses this information to determine where to place the annotation font size offers a choice of two fonts Small font size is set at 72 dots and the large font size is set at 144 dots per inch write mode prints the annotation on to the page as either transparent or opaque Selecting Transparent means that the image on the document is not deleted and the annotation is placed on top of the document image Selecting Opaque means that the annotation replaces the document image Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 39 Copy gt If Offis selected select comment and the Document Centre will display the list gt Select an empty slot in the Comment List gt Select Enter Page 3 40 HINT If the document image extends to the top edge of the page reduce the image to 90 of its document size to make room for the annotation If the same position is inadvertently selected for the date page numbering and comment they will be displayed in the default order comment left page number center and date right When date is selected there is a choice of format MM DD YY or DD MM YY NO
171. ed to a protective earthing circuit gt This product is equipped with a 3 wire type plug provided with a protective earthing pin This plug will fit only into an earthed power outlet This is a safety feature To avoid risk of electric shock contact your electrician to replace the receptacle if you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to a power source receptacle that lacks an earth connection terminal This product should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power available consult your local power company Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate the product where persons will step or trip on the cord Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 7 About This Guide Page 1 8 Use of an extension cord with this product is not recommended or authorised Users should check building codes and insurance requirements if a properly earthed extension cord is to be used Ensure that the total ampere ratings of the products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating Also make sure that the total amperage of all products plugged into the wall outlets does not exceed the outlet rating Disconnect Device for this product is the power cord To remove all electrical power to the product disconnect the power cord from the powe
172. eder When the documents are positioned correctly it will light up Page 3 4 Document Feeder Guide When Auto paper is selected the document feeder senses the size and orientation of the documents then checks the paper trays to find one that corresponds The size and orientation are displayed in the message area in the upper left hand corner of the touch screen NOTE This applies when paper supply is set to Auto and used with standard document sizes For non standard sizes manually select the paper tray required Document Glass The document glass should be used for single pages or bound originals up to a maximum of 11 x 17 size Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Copy gt Raise the document feeder or the document glass cover if fitted gt Place the document face down onto the document glass aligned with the tip of the registration arrow near the top left of the document glass gt Lower the document feeder Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 5 Constant Velocity Transport Glass The Constant Velocity Transport CVT glass is the narrow Strip of glass located at the left hand side of the document glass When documents are fed from the document feeder the CVT glass automatically scans the images into memory and does not apply to documents placed on the glass Constant Velocity Transport Glass 2 Select the Features button gt
173. ee resolutions as the default setting for outgoing fax documents The default selected depends on the types of documents users send most often ce Standard E Resolution J Lighter Darker Fine _j Original Type DW Communication Mode J Super Fine OC Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Standard 200 x 100 reduces communication time use for text documents Fine 200 x 200 combines the features of standard and super fine resolution use for most fax documents and for black and white graphics Super Fine 400 x 400 improves image quality and rendition use for photos halftones and images with grey tones Lighter Darker gt Select Lighter Darker gt Use the scroll buttons to select the default option requ ired DW Resolution E Lighter Darker a Original Type T Communication Mode Y Lighter Normal Darker Original Type gt Select Original Type gt Select the default option Cancel save required a description of Jm each follows J Lighter Darker Text DW Communication Mode LJ Photo Auto separates images into text and photo areas automatically and implements image processing for each area Text optimizes image processing for text lines and solid areas Photo optimizes image processing for photographs Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 51 Setups gt Select Forced 4800 gt
174. eeeeeaaeeeeeseaaas 6 5 Image Adjustment eceseeee eee ensceeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseeeeeeensaeeeeeeensaneeeeeensaeeeeeeensaeeeeeeeneas 6 7 Original Size EE 6 8 Basic Image Quality iii 6 9 Sides Image ann hein Re ne tin ts 6 10 ele re EE 6 11 Eesen e EE 6 12 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Output Format or Filing SetUps eee 6 14 Server IP Address Server Name 6 15 Document Path Volum e ssssmenensivnhinh anses trs 6 16 Document Name or Document Folder 6 16 Login Name Password NEEN 6 17 If File Already Exists or Filing Policy 6 17 Document Management Fields DC440 432 430 425 esceeesseeeeseeeeeneees 6 18 Authentication Mode Network Scanning es 6 22 Login Guest ACCESS rente M ai ies serrer etat entree 6 22 Login Network Authenticated ACCESS AA 6 23 Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access 6 24 Changing the Authentication Service 6 24 Logging Off oein ei as ane ee el a Re 6 25 Managing Scan Jobs eseu 6 26 Star QUE Snie NO rate et Ee date Eve 6 26 Completed Scan Jobs Queue DC440 432 430 425 ooo ceccsseeeeeessteeeeeeeaes 6 27 T TUN 7 1 Standard Fea UE S aaa ra pra tn nee end Ai Apie ipara iait 7 2 Entering a manual E mail address 7 3 Using the Address Books 7 4 Image Adjustment ss nnnenesnnennssnnnnenns 7 7 ue II 7 8 Basic Image Quality sis 7 9 e El E ET 7 10 Stored Image Settings
175. eegene ter eme re Die rene Tan geb 3 48 Stored BT 3 50 Managing Copy JODS a a a aata MEN intense 3 53 Print Queue cn A ee eal ee ee 3 53 Completed Print Jobs Queue ss 3 56 E 4 1 Embedded Fax Procedure 4 2 Sending a Fax using Embedded Fax 4 2 Standard Features Embedded Fax es 4 7 R solution mehr nan en ere et EEN 4 7 le ILR 4 8 Sides SCANNE EE 4 9 BET Ti a EE 4 10 More Features Embedded Fax 4 18 Cover Letter Cover Page su 4 19 Transmission Report 4 20 Be E RI 4 20 Communication Mode DC440 432 430 425 c ccseeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeetseeteeeees 4 21 Delayed E EE 4 22 Send Priority DC440 432 480 425 ooo eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 4 23 Advanced Features Embedded Fax 4 24 BU EITE SR ane tete ere eee reece cher creer reer 4 25 Wel Rule HE 4 26 Store Ton PONM BEE 4 27 PANET O0 EA EE A EAE EAA es 4 30 Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Mixed Size Originals DC426 420 4 33 Reports amp Setups Embedded Fax cccsseccceseecesseeeeneeeessseseseeeeesseeenseeeeneas 4 34 FAX R PONSE At Re teeta sake chet ee An 4 35 Answer MOOG ss ann diet te aaa a at Reese 4 36 Dial Directory Setup su 4 37 Comment le sie Mad an ee in et i ne pe Me eet 4 42 Transmit Header Print sus 4 43 Server Fax Procedure 440 432 430 425 rs sssnrerennenennneneennees 4 44 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page iii
176. eleased via the Document Centre control panel NOTE When using this feature ensure that the Print dialog in the application does not provide a Collate option If it does turn the Collate option OFF in order for the Sample Set feature to work properly If Collate is not turned OFF the application may submit the entire job as a single document Layout Watermarks tab used to change the layout of a document and add watermarks For example to display the word DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL diagonally across each page This feature also adjusts the size and placement of the watermark and enables the review of a sample page In addition documents can be printed 1 Up 2 Up and so on up to 16 Up Booklet Creation is also available from this screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 8 3 Page 8 4 Document Options tab Image Options tab Graphics mode PostScript tab General tab Details tab Capture Settings tab use this screen to select banner sheets transparency separator pages and to set margins use to select a negative image mirror image or bitmap smoothing for a document This feature can also be used to adjust the brightness contrast resolution and magnification Draft Mode printing enables the document to be printed in a reduced quality mode which uses less dry ink selects specific options when printing graphics for example raster or vector use this screen to select the postscript o
177. emory is available The fax communication finishes with an error message gt Select Machine Status and check the list of Failed Fax Jobs on the touch screen for the error code and the message Use the description and corrective action in the Table of Fault Codes at the end of this chapter The machine will not answer incoming calls gt Set the machine to Automatic Answer Mode The machine answers calls but will not accept incoming data gt If the job contains several graphics the machine might not have enough memory The machine will not answer if memory is low Additional memory is an option Vv Remove stored documents and jobs and wait for existing jobs to complete This will increase available memory An image is reduced on a transmission gt Confirm the original size of the documents Documents might be reduced based on the available standard paper supply at the receiving machine Vv If using Speed Dial check the setting for the Maximum Store Width that is programmed for that Speed Dial If the document is wider than the programmed setting the document will be reduced to match the programmed width Page 13 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Received fax and report documents will not gt Check the fax enabled paper trays in print Machine Status You might need to ask the Key Operator to change the settings Fo
178. emote server will supply a set of valid user and account numbers to the system and the machine validates this data before the job is allowed to begin Jobs can also be submitted to the Document Centre using the CentreWare driver Refer to the CentreWare Customer Documentation for further information NOTE The default password is 22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been assigned To enable Job Based Accounting a floppy disk must be purchased from Xerox The floppy disk is used to install the software NOTE This feature cannot be used if the Internal Auditron or External Auditron is in use Once the floppy has been installed then Job Based Accounting can be enabled as follows Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Access Auditron Setups gt Select External Accounting Make selections as required a description of each follows Enable Disable User ID Display Account ID Display Default User ID Default Account ID Action when full 1 Enable the software using the floppy disc 2 Configure the Third Party Accounting System 3 At the machine enable Job Based Accounting Internal Auditron S External Control Device External Accounting enables disables Job Based Accounting displays the user ID This can be set as Open Text or Secure If Secure is selected the characters entered will be displayed KKK KKK as displays the account ID This can be set as Open Te
179. en Delete documents This option is used to delete all of the electronic fax documents stored for polling Before deleting documents a confirmation message will appear on the touch screen Print documents Used to print the electronic documents stored for polling If the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is configured by the Key Operator to delete the stored documents after they are printed a confirmation message will appear confirming the request HINT Configuring the machine to delete the stored documents after printing saves memory Page 4 29 Fax Mailbox gt Select More Features gt Select Advanced Features gt Select Fax Mailbox gt Select Store to Mailbox gt Using the keypad on the control panel enter the mailbox number gt Load the documents gt Select Start Page 4 30 The Key Operator establishes mailboxes and passwords for the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 f an electronic mailbox is available electronic fax documents can be stored retrieved and deleted in the mailbox NOTE There is no password restriction for storing documents in a mailbox Store to Mailbox EZ Store to Mailbox Enter Mailbox number 001 200 L M then press Start Print from Mailbox fe Delete Mailbox Contents NOTE On the DC440 432 430 425 mailbox numbers are 3 digits from 001 200 On the DC 426 420 mailbox numbers are 2 digits from 01 30 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430
180. enaeeseaas 14 7 Specifications for the Embedded Fax Feature ss 14 8 Ee EN enee eege et nl nee din d alt 15 1 Terms Dette deed 15 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page ix Page x Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 1 About This Guide About This Guide Welcome to the Xerox family of Document Centre products This User Guide provides detailed information technical specifications and procedural steps when using the integrated features of the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 1 Page 1 2 Xerox Welcome Center If after product installation further assistance is required please call our experts using the Xerox Welcome Center telephone number When telephoning please quote the machine serial number which may be written in the space below The serial number is located behind the left hand front cover as shown Serial number The Xerox Welcome Center telephone number is provided at the time of product installation For convenience and future reference please record the telephone number in the space below Welcome Center Telephone Number Canada English French and local Toronto 800 939 3769 United States 800 821 2797 Also keep a record of any error messages This information can help problems to be resolved quickly Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Conventions Throughout this User Gui
181. ending on machine configuration Key Operator System Administrator Auditron Administrator DC440 432 430 425 Owner NOTE The factory default password is 22222 This password is used initially prior to new PINs being assigned To prevent unauthorized access it is recommended you change this password Please contact your Xerox Service Representative for further assistance Additional Setups Access Rights Setups C Service Access Control C E mail Setups Exit Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Each privilege determines the right to set up the default settings for a specified set of functions as shown in the table below Key System Auditron ir Operator Administrator Administrator Machine Setups Yes No No No Copy Yes No No No Setups Fax Yes Yes No No Setups Print No Yes No No Setups Network Scanning No Yes No No Setups E mail Setups DC440 No Yes No No 432 430 425 Authentication Setups No Yes No No DC440 432 430 425 Auditron Setups No No N A Yes DC440 432 430 425 Auditron Setups No No Yes No DC426 420 Access Rights No No No Yes More than one privilege can be assigned to an individual user Customer preference determines whether individual privileges are assigned to various users or all privileges assigned to only ONE user The following table illustrates a situation where various privileges are
182. enhances documents that have color backgrounds The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 adjusts its settings for different types of images a Power Saver Mode in which the Digital Copier shuts off after a combined 120 minutes of Stand by and Low Power Modes or after a programmed time out units for measuring data transmission speed units for measuring data transmission speed bits per second a single dialing command that ties together keypad dialing and dial directory locations for a single dialing operation output programming whereas each copy set is delivered in the same order the documents were placed in the Document Feeder Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Comments Communication Mode 440 432 430 425 Contrast Copy Print Cartridge Copy Sets Covers Default Settings Delayed Polling Delayed Start Dial Directory Dialing Characters Digital Copier Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide To and From lines on a fax cover page or an annotation on a copy job selects the communication mode used for transmission to a remote fax machine for example Super G3 G3 or Forced 4800bps the intensity of the display of an image or the degree of difference between the gray tones on a document page See also Halftone and Photo a customer replaceable unit that contains xerographic elements for the machine groups of copies of a multi page set of documents If you have
183. enience Stapler is an optional extra and can be installed if the Convenience Shelf is fitted It attaches to the right hand corner at the rear of the shelf and is positioned so that documents can be stapled straight or at an angle The Convenience Stapler can staple sets of 2 to 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper The staple cartridge holds 5000 staples Copy gt With the documents face up slide the corner to be stapled into the stapler gt The stapler will automatically staple the documents e During stapling the indicator light on the left hand side of the stapler will be lit gt Remove the stapled set from the Convenience Stapler Sides Imaged Page 3 14 Up to 50 double sided copies ranging in size from 8 1 2 x55 1 2 through 11 x 17 can be made automatically from one or two sided documents e 1 gt 1 single sided copies from single sided documents 1 gt 2 double sided copies from single sided documents e 2 gt 2 double sided copies from double sided documents e 2 gt 1 single sided copies from double sided documents NOTE The machine copies the second side of a document first When making double sided copies using drilled or pre printed paper load the paper the opposite way round to the single sided copying instruction label on the tray HINT When using the 1 gt 2 option and the document glass the machine will display a message when it is ready to scan side 2 Xerox Docume
184. enter the name of the recipient Up to 18 characters f an incorrect entry is made select the e button to backspace gt Select Next gt Select the desired default settings for the faxes to be sent to this recipient Resolution Communication Mode and Maximum Storage Width gt Select Next Page 4 38 mr smlth meesmith ds See 6e See ET E ES GG fe Sr Se PE YS ES ES jC AN ES E E Directory No 001 Resolution Maximum Store Width Mode Speed A4 4 A e Fa FE A ES Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt The Cover Letter screen will appear gt Select either On or Off If Off is selected Select Next gt If On is selected select the To Comment Directory No 001 Cover Letter To Comment Ch O a On LJ From Comment Comment List D Bo d 04 J GE gt Select a comment from the Comment List gt Select the From Comment gt Select a comment from the Comment List gt Select Next the Delayed Start options screen will be displayed gt Select Save OR select On and use the scroll arrows to indicate the hour and minutes when the fax is to be transmitted gt Select Save and then Close The Individual listing and all selections made for that listing will now be displayed in the Dial Directory Xerox Document Centre 440 432
185. er area to white and all the white images to black Page Edit DC440 432 430 425 This feature does not require the use of a marker pen hence pre scan is not required The editing function selected will be applied to the entire page The Document Glass or the Document Feeder can be used with Page Edit im om So Off Inversion Mirroring Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Off Mirroring Inversion Off Delete Inside Delete Outside Page Edit options the feature is not available a mirror image of the document is created changes all the black images on the page to white and all the white images to black Edit DC426 420 Edit is available on the DC426 420 For instructions on programming the Edit option refer to Area Edit DC 440 432 430 425 on page 3 31 Edit options the feature is not available scans everything outside the orange lines and ignores everything inside The center area will be blank scans everything inside the orange lines and ignores everything outside The outside area will be blank Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 33 Copy Output Format Copy Quick Pathway Select Features button on the control panel If necessary select Copy Select Added Features Select Output Format Transparencies Page 3 34 Select the features available on the Output Format screen to enhance the appearanc
186. erminal Setups cceecceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaeesseneeeseaaeeeennees 11 38 Fax Printing Options iii 11 44 Fax Report Options issii a eieiei ileal ehh ei 11 47 Fax Panel Defans eea e aa Ae ena Sa EAE ERA AARE einer ind AAR 11 50 Fax Malboxes in i RA ann E A AEA EE E 11 53 Fax File Management 0 ccceceeceeeneeceeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 11 55 Fax Communication Setups ccccccceceeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeesecaeeesaeeseeeeeeeeaeessaes 11 57 Outgoing Fax Ee Le IEN 11 58 Incoming FaX Options nw aia a el ane ee ees 11 63 Line Use Restriction DC440 432 430 425 cececccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeaes 11 66 AUGIIFON SCtU DS sssini neones chere eines sucedenetdesenccreeuducceraetsbandect Denon nue 11 67 Access Auditron Setup en 11 68 Internal Auditron DC440 432 430 425 ceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeseaeeeenes 11 69 Internal Auditron DC 2426 4201 11 76 Job Based Accounting optional DC440 432 430 425 n se 11 82 Foreign Interface Device 11 84 ACCESS e LCE 11 86 Estelle anne th eE ieee ates 11 89 AO BIEN 11 90 Set User Privilege Sde E 11 90 RER WEE 11 91 Service Access Control Authentication Mode DC440 43 2 43042 65e ue ne ee dosh en tee ones dame de 11 92 Network Scanning Setup eennennnnnte 11 94 Print SQUUpS Eege 11 96 E mail Setups DC440 432 430 425 rs rnnrrrrnsernennnnmennneneennnneennes 11 99 12MAIRICNRANCGE rene nsc anses Eed 12 1
187. es the images as needed to display them in landscape orientation on one page Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE 2 1 Bound Originals Image Shift Transparencies Booklet Creation Gray Scale Copying DC426 420 Build Job Mixed Size Originals or Annotation cannot be used with this feature Use the following steps to program N Up on the DC440 432 430 425 gt Load the documents in the document feeder Documents must be loaded long edge petaus cance save feed D Off Set Seier E Originals Output gt Make the required feature Portrait selections for the job Select a D Paper Supply and the EE sup Ef Landscape paper size required gt Select Added Features and then Output Format gt Select N Up gt Select either 2 Up or 4 Up gt Select landscape or portrait and then Save gt Enter the quantity Select Start On the DC426 420 gt Select Added Features and then Output Format gt Select 2 Up gt Select On Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 37 S O Annotation gt Load the documents gt Make the required feature selections gt Select Added Features gt Select Output Format gt Select Annotation The Annotation options will be displayed gt Select the option required and follow the instructions displayed on the screen gt Select Save
188. est image quality for graphics and photos recommended for line art It produces output with a resolution between super fine and standard This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 7 Super Fine 400 x 400 dpi Original Type Page 4 8 Text Auto Photo recommended for photos and halftones or images that have gray tones It requires more communication time but produces the best image quality Use this feature to identify the type of document being scanned for transmission L Fax More Advanced Reports amp Features Features Setups E Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing Standard J Text Next Destinatior Keypad J Fine J Auto J Dialing Characters Speed Dial J Super Fine J Photo j Telephone Dial Directory J use this setting for text line art and documents with large solid areas It produces sharp text images but might reduce the quality of halftone or photographic images This is the factory default setting senses the image and automatically selects the best text or photo option Use this setting for combinations of text and photos or text and graphics use this setting for photographs and images that have a continuous tone However it might reduce the sharpness of the text Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Sides Scanned
189. face device 84 build job copy 48 auditron access screen 26 build job fax 25 auditron enable setup 69 bypass tray auditron setups 67 loading paper 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide i High Capacity Traycompleted scan jobs queue 27 amp FinisherConfirmation sheet setup 95 fitted 7 left tray fitted 7 bypass tray specifications 5 C contention setup 13 convenience stapler loading staples 15 convenience stapler specifications 6 call for service procedure 20 convenience stapler stapling Canadian certification 16 13 Canadian CS 3 Complianceconventions 3 13 cautions conventions 5 Center Tray 10 centre tray specifications 5 changing the default time settings 12 changing the default time settings power save modes 12 cleaning constant velocity transport glass 3 control panel and touch screen 4 document feeder 4 document glass 3 output tray 4 the machine 3 clear all button 24 clear button 24 clearing jams 3 collated output copy 11 comment setup fax 42 communication mode setup 52 communication mode fax 21 company name setup 40 completed fax jobs queue 65 completed print job queue copy 56 completed print jobs queue 9 bracket text typeface 4 cautions 5 hints 5 italic typeface 4 notes 5 orientation 3 quick pathway 4 warnings 5 copy 1 2 up 36 added features 21 annotation 38 options 39 area edit options 32 booklet creation 44 bound originals 25 options 26
190. features 7 resolution 48 scan queue 26 sending a fax scan to fax internet services 1 select features 45 Si 2 load the scan to file internet services 24 doc ments scan with local copy internet services 27 46 scanning with internet services 3 dial the number 47 15 4 select start 47 secure fax receive setup 65 sides scanned 50 secure polling fax 28 standard features 44 send header requirements 11 server fax setups 67 send priority fax 23 server fax setups setups 36 sending a fax 2 server IP address server sending a fax using embedded name network fax 2 scanning 15 sending a fax using server faxservice access setup DC420 45 76 serial number 2 services tab internet services server fax 4 authentication mode 58 set user privileges 90 changing thesetup authentication long document 42 service 60 setup procedures setups 2 delayed send 57 setups 1 74 keypad 54 access fax communication lighter darker 55 setups 58 logging off 61 access rights 86 login guest access 58 access setups 4 login guest and network account setup 70 authenticated account setup DC420 77 access 60 account summary 74 login network activity report 47 authenticated add accounts 78 access 59 add modify accounts 71 more fax features 55 additional setups 15 original input size 56 administrator privileges 90 original size auditron 67 options 56 auditron administrator Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide xi tools 3 auditron enable setup
191. fer to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 5 Setups Machine Setups Quick Pathway Select Access on the Control Panel Enter Key Operator PIN see NOTE Select Machine Setups Page 11 6 Machine Setups contains the procedures for changing the default settings for the Document Centre Refer to the following pages for more information Paper Trays page 11 8 Date Time page 11 9 Walkup Screen page 11 11 Timers page 11 11 Contention page 11 13 Report Languages page 11 15 Touch Screen Contrast page 11 16 Customer Support No page 11 16 Paper Sizes page 11 17 Machine Serial Number page 11 17 Xerox Supplies Number page 11 18 Fault Override instructions are also included on page 11 19 NOTE These changes can only be made when a PIN Personal Identification Number which has been assigned Key Operator access rights is entered Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Access the Machine Setups gt Select Access on Size the Control Panel i aje Image r Output bp A pop up window will be Please enter your password Quality Collated using the keypad to your right displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select and use the number keypad to enter a Key Operator PIN see NOTE NOTE The default password 22222 may be used if PINs gt Select Enter in the
192. firmation report The report will display information about the Scan job including the completed status ofthe job For more information please refer to Managing Scan Jobs on page 6 26 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Image Adjustment Use the features available in Image Adjustment to temporarily Quick Pathway apply changes to a template Select Features on NOTE If Network Scanning is the default screen this tab will the control panel be called Added Features On selection it will change to Select Network Image Adjustment Scanning Select Image Refer to the following for more information Adjustment Original Size page 6 8 Basic Image Quality page 6 9 Sides Imaged page 6 10 Reduce Enlarge page 6 11 Stored Image Settings page 6 12 Erase page 6 13 Scanning Adjustment Format Original Size Basic Image Quality Sides Imaged Auto Sharpness Normal 1 Sided Auto Exposure Off Portrait Lighter Darker Normal Print Local Copy Off Erase Reduce Enlarge Stored Image Settings fa Normal 300 x 300 dpi Off 100 Same as Original TFF NOTE Any changes that are made using the Image Adjustment features are discarded after the Clear All timer expires or the Clear All button is selected Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 7 Network Scanning Original Size gt Select Original Size gt Select the
193. formation can be accessed by third party applications to retrieve or route the stored images Eye Network Image Output Scanning Adjustment Format Server IP Address Document Path Document Name C 132102301 C fev2 30 C NETSCAN Login Name Password If File Already Exists Document Management C netscan Q Overwrite Existing File Fields A maximum of 6 entries can be displayed for editing at the Document Centre Users may be offered default values for an entry and this value can be temporarily altered for the job being scanned Document Management Fields information is stored in the job log xst file along with the scanned image file Using a template containing Document Management Fields information NOTE A template containing Document Management Field information needs to be created Refer to Document Management Fields on page 9 22 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 19 Network Scanning gt Place a document on the Document Glass or in the d Network h O t Document Feeder ep ES Server IP Address Document Path Document Name gt Select All Services C 132102301 812 380 NETSCAN gt Select Network Scanning SC Login Name Password Document Management t 0 ite Existing Fil 7 Fields gt Select the required template OE e containing Document Management Fields data The Document Management Fields data contained in the template will be displayed on the t
194. from this queue and displayed in the Completed Scan Jobs queue Destination Type Owner Status Scanned Filed This queue maintains active and pending scan jobs The Scan Queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time Active jobs appear at the top of the queue and completed jobs follow in descending order based on the job completion time When the queue reaches its capacity the oldest jobs are deleted to make room for new jobs If all 50 jobs are active and pending jobs no new jobs will be added until an active job is completed Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Destination this is the destination folder for the job Type the type of job based on the network setup Owner the name of the template owner as defined in the template file Status information about the progress of a job such as active or faulted Scanned Filed the number of sheets scanned and filed for active jobs Display displays information on the jobs contained in the Scan queue Use the toolbar across the top of the Scan Queue to manage the jobs Delete deletes the selected job Details displays additional information about a job in the Scan Queue Other Queues displays the other job queues available Completed Scan Jobs Queue DC440 432 430 425 The Completed Scan Jobs Queue displays information on all Completed Scan jobs Completed jobs are those that
195. ghts to bring a complaint to the FCC under FCC rules Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide The telephone company may make changes to its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures Such action must be reasonable required in the operation of their business and consistent with FCC rules They must give you prior written notification if the changes can gt Make your machine incompatible with their equipment gt Require modification or alteration of the machine gt Otherwise physically affect performance of the machine WARNING When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning hours or late evenings Canadian CSO3 Notice The Industry Canada Label on the machine identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications networks protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring
196. gt Select Sides Scanned to access the options available 1 Sided 2 Sided 1 2 2 2 Fax This is used to specify whether the documents are single sided or double sided and in some instances the orientation is also required Fax More Advanced Reports amp All Features Features Setups Services A eS Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing Dialing Characters J Speed Dial Di n Telephone Dial Director Standard J Text J The following options are available each document is single sided each document is double sided the first page of the set of documents is single sided and the rest of the document is double sided If the document is double sided specify the type of document Portrait or Landscape Head to Head or Head to Toe Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 9 Dialing Refer to the following pages for information about the Dialing options Next Destination Use this feature to send a fax to more than one location Speed dial numbers full numbers group numbers or a mixture up to a maximum of 50 entries and 249 destinations 200 via speed dial numbers and 49 via full dial numbers can be entered gt Enter the first fax number using the keypad speed dial etc gt Select Next Destination SE the touch screen displays the k z3 Z a 003 Dial Directory lt D j py LE
197. h follows gt Make changes as required gt Select Save to continue Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Power Save Auto Off This function is dependant on the machine configuration 60 minutes after the last copy or print out the machine will automatically switch into Power Save Sleep Auto Off Mode If the DC426 420 is not connected to a network the machine switches the Power ON OFF switch to the off position Any stored jobs remain in the memory and the DC426 420 returns to an operational condition when powered on DW Auto Clear J Low Power a EZ Save WY NOTE If Low Poweris set higher than Power Save Auto Off the machine displays a message that Low Power cannot exceed Power Save Auto Off 5 240 minutes Select Contention to set up Interrupt and or the Print Queue Priority option Interrupt Button Print Queue Priority EE Page 11 13 Setups Interrupt on Set Boundary Interrupt on Page Boundary Localization gt Select Localization gt Select the preferred measurement display format Inches or Millimeters gt Select Save Page 11 14 Interrupt Button The Interrupt feature enables the current job to be stopped and held in memory while another job is completed When enabled the Key Operator can set up Interrupt to function on completion of the current set or the current page When the Interrupt job is complete programming for
198. he fault messages do not clear after having removed paper jammed in the machine switch the machine off and then on again Ensure that the relevant power On Off instructions as described in Chapter 2 of this User Guide are followed CAUTION Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between repeated power OFF ON can result in damage to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 hard drive Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 3 Problem Solving Problem Solving Tables If you are experiencing difficulty using the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 check the suggestions in the following tables for problem solving advice Symptom Recommendation The machine will not power ON gt Check the power cord installation gt Check to see if the power button is in the ON position gt Check to see if the AC outlet is receiving voltage Connect another appliance to the outlet to verify the voltage The machine makes a squealing noise gt 3 to 5 minutes after powering OFF the after it powers OFF machine might make a squealing noise This is a normal occurrence Various components within the machine are still powering OFF The document will not feed through the gt Check to see if the Document Feeder is Document Feeder overloaded The Document Feeder can hold a maximum of 50 pages Vv Check to see if the document is fully inserted into the Document Feeder v Using a lint free cloth lightly wipe the Pla
199. he job in the Completed Fax Jobs Queue displays the other job queues available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Connecting Fax to the ISDN Digital Line Embedded Fax DC440 432 430 425 The Xerox DC440 432 430 425 is capable of working at a maximum speed of 33 6Kbps across a good quality analogue telephone line to another fax machine with the same speed capability This speed is dependant upon the quality of the connection the poorer the quality the slower the speed ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network is a digital alternative to the analogue network To connect the Xerox DC440 432 430 425 to the ISDN requires the use of a Terminal Adapter TA to interface between the machine s analogue modem and the digital network Once connected to the TA the machine will operate in the same way as if it were connected to an analogue telephone system Fax documents can be sent or received in exactly the same manner as before Currently a standard ISDN line is capable of providing two separate telephone connections each of which can have its own telephone number The Xerox DC440 432 430 425 can take full advantage of this feature and improve its productivity by being fitted with a second fax option and connecting both fax ports to a TA that supports two analogue ports It will then be capable of simultaneously sending and or receiving two faxes at the same time over the same ISDN line Terminal Adapters
200. he labels should be removed and replaced in the box Card stock typically Covers signs e Trays 1 2 3 4 do not use 110lb substance 110 business cards in these trays e Bypass Tray load LEF or SEF face up Maximum performance may not be achieved when feeding 90lb 110lb substance 90 110 SEF stock e High Capacity Feeder load LEF face down NOTE To ensure maximum performance when loading stock of 321bs or heavier into the Bypass Tray or High Capacity Feeder it is recommended that the Heavyweight option is selected as the Type in the Tray Attributes screen Page 10 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Media Use Specifications Cover stock Booklets Trays 1 2 3 4 load LEF or SEF face up Bypass Tray load LEF or SEF face down High Capacity Feeder load LEF face down Transparencies clear removable strip and paperbacked Paperbacked transparencies can be used but may not give maximum performance Presentations and overhead projection data Trays 1 2 3 4 load LEF or SEF with the removable strip down and on the left Paperbacked transparencies should not be fed from these trays Bypass Tray load LEF or SEF paper or removable strip up Always feed paperbacked transparencies long edge feed only with the glued edge as the feed edge No special instructions for clear transparencies High Capacity Feeder loa
201. he user Custom size programming High Capacity Feeder optional Capacity 2000 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Paper Sizes 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Paper Weights 16 110lb substance 16 110 Paper Supply for Envelope Tray optional Capacity 70 sheets of 24lb substance 24 envelopes Envelope Sizes 6 1 2 x 3 9 to 10 x 7 Paper Weights 16 24lb substance 16 24 Center Tray Capacity approximately 500 sheets Paper Sizes 4 x 6 SEF to 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weights 16 110Ib substance 16 110 Delivery face down in order with offsetting Left Tray Capacity 200 sheets Paper Sizes 4 x 6 SEF to 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weights 16 110Ib substance 16 110 Delivery face up in order without offsetting Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 14 5 Specifications Finisher optional Capacity 1000 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Paper Sizes 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 to 11 x 17 Paper Weights 16 110Ib substance 16 110 Set Size 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Staples 5000 per cartridge Staples 2 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper NOTE Envelopes should not be fed to the Finisher Convenience Stapler optional Capacity 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Staples 5000 per cartridge Staples 2 50 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Page 14 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Tower Mailbox option
202. hear the click of the Finisher inserting the staple Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 7 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation Using the Edit feature causes the machine to display a fault gt Press firmly when using the marker to ensure that the machine can detect the edit marks v Do not select Interrupt or Pause when using Edit v Keep the Document Feeder closed securely when scanning an edited document The exception is when using Bound Originals and Original Size v Do not place edit marks within 1 4 of the edge of a document wi The edited area must be fully enclosed If you draw a circle square or other object around the area to be edited you must close the object to ensure that the machine edits the area as programmed Page 13 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Streaks lines spots OR black solid dotted lines on every other copy gt Clean the Document Glass CVT Glass areas under the Platen Cover the Document Feeder and the paper guides gt If the machine has been idle for an extended period of time or if the Copy Print Cartridge is new begin the job again gt Run the job from the Document Glass gt Reinstall the Copy Print Cartridge gt Check the quality of the document Use Border Erase or Edge Erase to remove lines and marks from the
203. ia CentreWare Internet Services The DC440 432 430 425 will not allow the import of an Public Address Book file that does not end with the CSV file extension A valid CSV file is of the format lt name gt lt SMTP e mail address gt For example the following are both valid format CSV file entries Smith smith company com Smith John john smith company com NOTE The order in which entries are displayed in the Public Address Book at the Document Centre will depend on how the entries are sorted in the CSV file Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 5 E mail Page 7 6 Internal Address Book Change Address Book Keyboard Done ai Name Jane Smith E mail Address Jane Smith main com Business Phone 020 468 623 6179 Business Address 800 Church Road Office Room 101 Smith Jane Smith James J Smith Joan J Smith John J City London Smith Joshua J County Postcode NW7 Smith Katherine Katherine Otherwise known as the LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol stores internal company addresses on the company network The Internal Address Book is created by the System Administrator The Document Centre will display search results for the Internal Address Book as defined by the LDAP configuration For example an LDAP server can return a search enquiry And as Andrew Smith when the result Andrews James may have been expected The lt lastname first
204. ide the remaining pages of the job into several small jobs and run the job again Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 5 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation The machine did not enlarge an 8 1 2 x gt 11 x 17 paper can only be loaded in the 11 document on to an 11 x 17 page trays short edge feed Load the 8 1 2 x 11 document short edge feed The machine cannot rotate an image on 11 x 17 paper It only rotates images on to 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed paper v Select a percentage for enlargement v The machine displays a tray fault Open the paper tray v Move the paper tray guides away from the paper v Move the paper tray guides against the paper so that they are just touching the paper Power the machine Off and then On v v Deformed transparencies Check to see if Transparencies is selected on the touch screen The machine automatically adjusts for different types of media Paper can tolerate more heat than transparencies v Use the Left Tray instead of the Center Tray v Annotation did not work Check features programmed Annotation cannot be used with N Up 2 Up on the DC426 420 Greyscale copying DC426 420 Booklet Creation Build Job uncollated copies custom size documents or Bound Documents Re program the job v Machine does not edit Replace the editing marker v Inserts have
205. ied when sending a fax For more information about the features available refer to the following Build Job page 4 25 Poll Remote Fax page 4 26 Store for Polling page 4 27 Fax Mailbox page 4 30 Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Mixed Size Originals DC426 420 page 4 33 Build Job Poll Remote Fax Store for Polling Fax Mailbox Original Size C Q Ee Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Build Job gt Load the first section of the document set gt Select the features for the first part of the job gt Select Build Job and then On gt Select Start the documents will be scanned The Build Job feature selection screen will appear on the touch screen gt Make any programming changes for the next section gt Load the documents and select Start Repeat the above steps until all the sections of the document set have been scanned in gt Select End Build Job when the last section of the job has been scanned in The job will be faxed If the machine reaches a low memory level during a build job operation the job will be cancelled Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax Use Build Job when both the Document Feeder and the Document Glass are required within the same job or if different programming selections are required for pages or sections of the job Je On End Build Job When all segmen
206. ifferent paper type or color reprogram the features as required in Change Attributes Page 10 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Auto Tray Switching This feature has to be enabled on the machine Contact the Key Operator for further assistance Once enabled if loading more than one tray with paper of the same size and type the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 automatically switches from one tray to the other if the active tray runs out of paper This is called Auto Tray Switching However the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 will not automatically switch to a tray that contains a different size type or color of paper Ts HINT On the DC440 432 430 425 the Bypass Tray can also be used with Auto Tray Switching When not in use the paper trays can be opened and paper can be loaded while the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is running However do not open the active tray This will cause the machine to stop Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 11 Paper and other media Storing and Handling Paper Page 10 12 Always use high quality xerographic grade paper in the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Damaged curled or damp paper can cause jams and image quality problems Follow these simple rules to store paper Store paper in dry conditions away from extreme heat or cold such as radiators or open windows Store paper flat on a shelf or pallet above floor level Leave the paper w
207. iginal Size cancet o ed Te gt Select OK You have selected to Log Off from the Authentication Service Reduce Enlar Select OK to confirm FAN Normal Select Cancel to remain Authenticated EI i 100 SONO E NOTE If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the Auditron at the same time as Authentication the user will be logged off the other service at the same time as logging off from Authentication Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 61 LAN Fax Local Area Network Fax When the Document Centre is connected to a network faxes can be sent from a Workstation directly to the Document Centre to be forwarded on to the destination machine As with faxes scanned in at the Document Centre faxes sent over the network will be placed in the Fax Queue before being sent on to the final destination NOTE LAN Fax and Server Fax cannot be installed at the same time LAN Fax Features To send faxes over the network users must select the Document Centre as the printer in the Print Screen at the Workstation Selecting the pull down menu in Job Type will display the Fax option Selecting Fax will display Fax Setup which can be used to set up the Fax features The following options are available for programming Fax used to enter the fax recipient information as well as select the required resolution and cover page Phonebook use to store regularly used telephone numbers Cover Page en
208. images as e mail attachments Users can also add and remove recipients change the From e mail address and edit the Subject line of the e mail message NOTE Refer to the CentreWare Customer Documentation for more information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 1 E mail Standard Features Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary All Services Select E mail Page 7 2 Users can select the features available within the E mail screen to enter the SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol e mail addresses or search the internal public address books to select the address information to build the address list for a job Up to 128 recipient addresses can be entered in to the list The E mail screen can be set up as the default on selection of the Features button NOTE An SMTP compliant e mail address format must be used For example anyone anycompany com Please refer to the following page for information on how to use the E mail feature For more information about the features available refer to Image Adjustment page 7 7 Output Format page 7 13 Authentication page 7 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Entering a manual E mail address gt Load document into the Document Feeder or place it on the Document Glass gt Select E mail gt Select To gt Using the keypad enter the recipient details NOTE Use the button
209. images printed on them Insert blank sheets of paper with the documents to mark each location for an insert Page 13 6 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Drilled paper holes are on the wrong side gt For two sided copying using drilled paper load the paper the opposite of the single sided copying instructions on the tray This is because the machine copies the second side of a document first Blank output gt Check to see if the document is loaded face up in the Document Feeder gt If the Copy Print Cartridge is new the toner might not be dispensed Repeat the job gt Check to see if the seal tape is removed from the new Copy Print Cartridge gt Reinstall the Copy Print Cartridge gt Replace the Copy Print Cartridge Paper sometimes folds over when it is delivered to the Finisher gt When using paper longer than 8 1 2 x 11 select the Center Output Tray instead of the Finisher To staple the output begin by selecting and then releasing the button on the top edge of the Finisher A green light is displayed If a job is currently in process the light will flash Wait until the job finishes and then try again Looking at the Finisher from the left end of the machine you will see an imprint of a staple next to a green tab above the Left Tray Slide the document face down toward the stapler over the green tab until you
210. in the fair use or library reproduction provisions of the copyright law Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office Library of Congress Washington DC 20559 circular R21 Wi Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization Foreign naturalization certificates may be photographed gt Passports Foreign passports may be photographed gt Immigration papers gt Draft Registration cards gt Selective Service Induction papers which bear any of the following information Registrant s earnings or income Registrant s dependency status Registrant s court record Registrant s previous military service Registrant s physical or mental condition NOTE Exception US Army and Navy discharge certificates may be photographed Page 1 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Badges identification cards passes or insignias carried by military or Naval personnel or by members of the various Federal Departments and Bureaus such as the FBI and Treasury unless the photograph is ordered by the head of such Department or Bureau Copying of the following is also prohibited in certain states automobile licences drivers licenses and automobile Certificates of Title This list is not all inclusive In case of doubt consult your attorney About This Guide Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 19 Ground Fault Interrupter GFI If a fault i
211. ing characters are entered as part of the fax number this feature can be selected from the Server Fax main screen or from the Send List Phonebook feature gt Select the character required gt Select Add aad enter cose gt Repeat the above steps for A Dal Pause LC each character E e Group Dial j gt Enter exit Mask Data 7 eee fone sy Refer to the following for more information NOTE Please check with the Third Party Vendor as to whether the following options are supported Dial pause to pause between numbers The actual delay depends on the Fax Server Long Pause I to pause between numbers As Dial Pause but a longer pause is added between numbers Group Dial N sends to a group of fax numbers stored on the Fax Server Follow the Group Dial character with the Group number configured on the Fax Server Mask data to protect confidential information Select the forward slash character before entering confidential numbers After entering the last confidential number select the slash Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 53 character again to turn off Mask Data The characters or numbers entered between the slash characters are displayed as asterisks Password Check Switch S for remote terminal identification This character verifies that the correct number has been dialed which is very important if sending a confide
212. job as soon as the account limit has been reached For the Copy feature any pages committed to print will be allowed to print Therefore the account limit may be exceeded The maximum number of pages allowed after the limit has been reached is three pages For Fax jobs no extra pages are allowed beyond the account limit Terminate on Job Boundary the machine allows the current job to be completed No further jobs are allowed until the limit is increased or the counter reset Account Summary DC440 432 430 425 This feature provides access to all of the Auditron accounts and their associated counters It also enables an individual counter or all account counters to be cleared and account information to be downloaded to a PC or printer Page 11 74 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Account Summary gt Make selections and changes as required See the following page for details Scroll List Search Counters and Limits Display Clear Counters Clear All Counters Download All Accounts DC440 432 430 425 Download Clear Clear All All Accounts Counters Counters imit Counter Account Number Copy 0 mmm DW Search v use the scroll buttons to access each account to review the counters associated with that account The scroll list displays all accounts in numerical order with the lowest account number appearing at the top
213. k cover page and dial send options NOTE This is only available with LAN Fax Delay Print delays processing a job until a later time After selecting Delay Print enter the time of day the job is to be processed The job will be placed on hold until the Page 8 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide specified time The job is then released automatically and placed at the end of the list of pending jobs in the Print Queue The job is then formatted and printed as a normal job Jobs can be released either locally or remotely prior to the specified time To release a job select the job in the Print Queue and select Release The job will be placed at the end of the pending jobs in the Print Queue and processed normally Secure Print enables a password to be entered to protect a job The job will be held in a queue and not printed until the same password is entered at the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 To print the job select the job in the Print Queue and press the Release button The Secure Print Login pop up window prompts a password to be entered to release and print the job If a time out period is enabled and the job is not released during this time the machine automatically deletes the job Sample Print enables users to print and proof a single copy of a document before printing the remaining document sets copies The remaining sets are held in the Document Centre print queue until the job is r
214. l Setups Fax Printing Options Output Selection Left Stapled Finisher In Fax Setups Server Fax f stapled is selected and the Finisher is Setups Output Tray not installed Server Fax prints are sent Options to the Left Tray Finisher In Fax Setups Embedded The machine will not print Fax jobs if the Fax if both Fax options Finisheris disabled and the default is the are enabled Fax Left Tray Terminal Setups Fax Printing Options Output Selection Left Tray Finisher In Print Setups Printer The machine will not print Print jobs if the Setups Tray Settings Finisher is disabled and the default is the Destination Tray Left Tray Left Tray Finisher In Copy Setups Output The machine will not print Copy jobs if Stapled the Stapler is disabled and also is the default The Output button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Finisher In Fax Setups Fax The machine will not print Fax jobs if the Terminal Setups Fax Finisher is disabled and the default Printing Options Output output is the Left Tray Selection Left Tray Finisher In Print Setups Printer The machine will not print Print jobs if the Setups Tray Settings Finisher is disabled and the default is the Destination Tray Left Tray Left Tray Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 21 Setups Disabled Component Service Feature Disabled Feature Result Finisher In Copy Setups Output Collated Left Tra
215. late Pool Aia Rp nr A eee TE ere 9 16 Template Management 9 16 SCAN MO File is Mrrssmihi a damien eege seat 9 24 SCANHO FAX Es re re ns net ea ieee idee alee ats 9 27 Scan with Local COPY rec dant deet idem items attente dater dee 9 27 Problem Solvitn seess Ee DEENEN aaraa EENS 9 28 10 Paper and other media ecccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeees 10 1 LOadINg paper ernia iaa ENEE cine ess 10 2 Preparing paper for loading 10 2 Loading the paper trays eee eceeeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeetenaees 10 2 Th Bypass NK 10 6 The Envelope Tray optional 10 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide The High Capacity Feeder optional 10 10 Auto BREET 10 11 Storing and Handling Paper 10 12 Other TI EE 10 13 Media Uses and Special Considerations 0c cccsscceeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 10 13 REKT TT si vis ceva T A A E E 11 1 Setup Procedure iii ccsiscsceetcceeteeetecedecrsectceceans ty eet aenn aaaeeeaa aae iani aeaa aenaran sahinasna 11 2 Key Operator Kee EEN 11 2 System Administrator Tools 11 3 Auditron Administrator Tools 11 3 Owner TOOS raza a NM cree ren marre les A date ee ren nn i Tite 11 4 Changing the Geitinge sisirin hadani aeniea inania aorin it as aae ia 11 4 Machine S tups eessen dee see 11 6 Access the Machine Getups 11 7 Paper Tra SeTUPS 2 era hand deeg dh dree ege 11 8 DateTime Setup eg ee era an ee alien ia
216. lect On or Off Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Receive Header Print DC440 432 430 425 When enabled the machine automatically prints information about the transmitting machine on the top of each page J Auto Answer Delay RS Receive Header Print DW Ring Volume LJ Secure Fax Receive D RW Junk Fax Prevention Secure Fax Receive DC440 432 430 425 This feature ensures that incoming faxes are treated as secure faxes DW Auto Answer Delay DW Receive Header Print E ie J Ring Volume Secure Fax Receive J Junk Fax Prevention Ge Page 11 65 Setups Line Use Restriction DC440 432 430 425 gt Select Line Use Restriction gt Select Line 1 or Line 2 gt Select Receive Only to reserve this line for incoming fax documents gt Alternatively select Transmit and Receive to enable the chosen line to accept incoming and outgoing fax documents gt Select Save and then Close Page 11 66 Where more than one line is connected to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 this feature enables one line to be reserved for incoming fax documents NOTE It is recommended that Line 1 is used to receive faxes and Line 2 set to transmit and receive faxes SS C Outgoing Fax Options C Incoming Fax Options C Line Use Restriction ct so Line 1 EN ES Transmit and Receive Line 2 DW Receive Only Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420
217. ling finisher 12 margin shift setup 31 media uses special considerations 13 media print 1 mixed size originals DC420 fax 33 modes 16 feature button 17 job status button job status button 18 machine status button 19 more fax features server fax 55 more features fax 55 N n up copy 36 network scanning 2 authentication mode 22 basic image quality 9 options 9 documen tnamer 16 document management fields 18 document path volume 16 erase 13 options 13 if file already exists 17 image adjustment 7 login name password 17 original size 8 options 8 output format 14 public and private templates 5 reduce enlarge 11 options 11 server IP address server name 15 sides imaged 10 options 10 stored image settings 12 options 12 template and template list 4 network scanning authentication login guest access and network authenticated access 24 network scanning authentication login guest access 22 network scanning authentication login network authenticated Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide access 23 output quality 19 network scanningoutput selection setup 46 authentication logging output copy 10 off 25 P network scanning setups 94 page edit options copy 33 network scanning changingpage edit copy 32 the authenticationpage margin setup 44 service 24 paper and other media 1 next destination fax 10 paper attributes setup 46 notes conventions 5 paper loading 2 O paper lo
218. ly the programming selections NOTE If blank sheets are not placed in the set of documents to mark the location of the inserts the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 prints the image from the next page on to the insert Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 43 Copy gt After the last entry has been made select Save gt Load the documents into the document feeder and select Start Booklet Creation E tg A Page 3 44 im caes DW Off First Insert Tray Pages 3 5 First Insert Tray Trey 2 ES Tray 1 Pa Nes LJ hive is Tray 4 Eet ee T Tray 2 LJ Delete Last Insert NOTE When 2 2 is selected the insert page range increases from 1 50 to 1 99 This is because each 2 sided page counts as 2 pages Bypass Tra When this feature is selected the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 will print two pages side by side on both sides of each page To create a booklet fold the copies in half The pages will appear in the correct order HINT If the number of document pages is a multiple of four the booklet will not contain blank pages Otherwise the extra pages in the book will be blank NOTE Booklet Creation is not available on the cabinet configuration or platen or simplex configurations Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Load the documents in the Document Feeder long edge feed and in order with the first page on top gt Select
219. m Administrator for further assistance Login Guest Access A login passcode is required gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode Eve Network Image Output Scanning Adjustment Format gt Select Enter Guest Access Provide a login passcode Type passcode using the keypad to the right then select Enter C Enter Page 4 58 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Login Network Authenticated Access Fax A login name and password are required gt Select Enter Eye Network Image Scanning Adjustment Network Authenticated Access Select the Enter button to type your login name and password gt Using the keyboard enter the network user name Change More NOTE Select More User Name Vicky Characters i required Js Joes Je Jen Jes Jes em Jes es Jn Je Ts JC Co YY A ae E ESS IES ED at IEEE gt Select Enter gt Enter the network password NOTE Select More enter Characters if required Pawo ET LEA ES es a Fs eS gt Select Enter Jagga displayed The machine 15 now RSS amaii ER NE ER NE NE EE processing the log in request The machine will now attempt to authenticate the user on the network Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 59 Login Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be e
220. m the Details screen The job is removed from the Fax Queue and placed in the Completed Fax Jobs Queue with an error in the Status column Other Queues displays the other job queues available Completed Fax Jobs Queue The Completed Fax Queue button will only be displayed if Fax is available Name Maintains completed fax jobs that were successful or terminated at the user s request or due to a fault Name the name of the destination for the job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 65 Page 4 66 Type Owner Status Pages Details Other Queues the job category such as receive broadcast immediate LAN fax mailbox polled mailbox polling mailbox receive mailbox send manual poll polled polling send and unknown power interruption the person who submitted the job For LAN fax jobs this is the name of the person submitting the job For fax send broadcast mailbox send and polling reservation jobs the owner is displayed as local information about the progress of the job such as complete or an error indicated by a specific error code the number of pages stored in memory for transmission and the number of pages transmitted Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage jobs When a toolbar button is selected a pop up window is displayed Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested action displays additional information about t
221. m unauthorized access Users must enter this passcode number to gain access Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Networked Authenticated when enabled users will need to enter their name and Access password to gain access to protected features The user name and password are sent to a server for verification Users have the option of selecting an alternative verification server Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 93 Setups Network Scanning Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter the System Administrator PIN Select Network Scanning Page 11 94 Network Scanning is an optional feature available on a network connected DC440 432 430 426 425 420 When enabled this feature allows users to scan hard copy documents at the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 and store the images ona NetWare or TCP IP file server NOTE Refer to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide for more information Es Setups C Machine Setups Copy Setups Fax Setups C Print Setups C Network Scanning Auditron Setups Job Template Pool This feature provides the filing protocol option for the location of the template pool The default settings for either TCP IP or Netware can be set here Default Repository This is the filing location that is used by the default template default xst Xerox D
222. mage and make a clear copy Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Output gt Select Output gt Use the scroll buttons to select the default output option required Stapled Uncollated Left Tray Collated Collated Center Tra Left Tray Uncollated Center Tray or Collated Center Tray lt gt NOTE The options available will be dependent on the machine configuration The factory default is Collated Center Tray gt Select Save w ll 7 HINT Typically the Center Tray is used for copy output and the Left Tray is used for fax output Sides Imaged gt Select Sides Image gt Select the preferred default options see below for an Sides Imaged explanation BE Je 2 sed gt Select Save NOTE The options available Ei eren m ms will be dependent on the machine configuration Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 29 Setups 1 1 Sided 2 gt 1 Sided 1 2 Sided 2 gt 2 Sided Head to Head Head to Toe Portrait or Landscape Page 11 30 single sided copies from single sided originals single sided copies from double sided originals double sided copies from single sided originals double sided copies from double sided originals For 2 Sided options also select the orientation the top of the document on each side is at the top of the page This is the factory default setting the image on the
223. meet local requirements The factory default presets are 1 100 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 through 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 through 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 through 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 through 8 1 2 x 11 Ow ONY cs J Gens Preset Value a a Ges 100 E Custom Custom lt gt The Custom settings are used to reduce or enlarge non standard document sizes onto standard paper X and Y values are selected from a range of 25 to 400 x Y ke 25 400 a 25 400 a Ch Ke IS m Custom Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 27 Setups Image Quality gt Select Image Quality gt Use the scroll buttons to select the Original Type Original Type Lighter Darker according to the document a a type used most frequently See below for an explanation y Y of each gt Set the default level of darkness or lightness required for each orig type gt Select Save Page 11 28 inal Text for documents that contain line art and low quality halftones Colored backgrounds are automatically suppressed This is the factory default Auto for documents that contain text photo and graphic combinations Colored backgrounds are automatically suppressed and line edges and text sharpened Photo for documents that contain photographs This setting identifies the use of black white and halftones to focus on the photo i
224. ment Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Erase Used to erase unwanted marks from the scanned document gt Select Erase gt Select the option required gt Select Save m m Border Erase m Edge Erase pernas cas ser Erase Options Off scanning is edge to edge Border Erase erases equal amounts 0 2 in from the top bottom and both sides of the document Edge Erase erases amounts 0 2 in specified from the top bottom and both sides independently of each other Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 13 Network Scanning Output Format or Filing Setups Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel Select Scan Select Output Formats gt Select the features as required gt Apply changes gt Select Save gt Select Start Page 6 14 This screen displays the network location for Network Scanning jobs that are programmed in the selected template These settings may be altered and applied to the scan job Refer to the following for more information Server IP Address Server Name page 6 15 Document Path Volume page 6 16 Document Name page 6 16 Login Name Password page 6 17 If File Already Exists page 6 17 Document Management Fields page 6 18 NOTE Any changes that are made using the Output Format features are discarded after the Auto Clear timer expires or the Clear All button is
225. ment Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax Reports Fax The following reports are available on the machine a e DN Activity Report pa Ghee DW e Y Dial Directory Dial Directory PR e an 051100 Dial Groups Dial Directory Dial Directory Complete Report 01 150 Fax Report Options Activity Report contains information about the last 50 communications completed on the machine and can either manually or automatically print a report of the telephone line activity for both receiving and transmitting jobs This report does not count the cover page as a transmitted page but it does count the receipt of a cover page if created by the machine as a received page Pending Jobs Report contains information about the jobs still in memory In addition this report gives a percentage of available memory Options Report DC426 420 provides the current settings for the machine and the programmed comments message stamp comments stored jobs and firmware version Dial Directory Report provides information about the Dial Directory numbers Print a Complete Report complete report or specific sections of the report the first 50 numbers 51 100 101 150 151 200 or Dial Groups Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 35 Answer Mode gt Select Answer Model gt Select the option required Auto Answer Manual Answer Page 4 36 There are two answering or receiving modes A
226. mplates in Services Stored Templates Button Operation New Creates a new template with the default template attributes Delete Deletes the selected template Copy Copies the selected template to a new renamed template Template Summary Individual Template Summaries are accessed via Services Stored Templates or Properties Services Default Template and contain information about the template s current scan print or fax settings The summary contains the template name and the selected services for the template along with the parameters specified for each defined service NOTE Templates with the symbol at the beginning of a name are created with Internet Services These templates cannot take advantage of the distribution capabilities of Network Scanning Services Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Template Services Services provide the file fax print and scan parameters for template operation These are defined by the System Administrator on the default template but users can change the parameters of a template in Stored Templates by creating a new template or modifying an existing template For example a private repository can be defined in a File Service for a specific scanning template The minimum requirement is that either File or Fax Service needs to be specified for a template The following table shows the available File Fax Print Local Copy and Sca
227. n it is held in memory until the problem is resolved A password is required to release a Secure Print job Each user sets his or her password s at the network user application driver Different passwords for each job or one password for all jobs can be set Other jobs in the queue bypass this job and are completed After a problem has been resolved or when ready to print the held job select the job and touch Release Delete deletes the selected job from the Print Queue After the job is deleted all of the resources allocated to that job are also released In an open system no access control any job can be deleted by any user If an active job is deleted it stops printing immediately and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs Queue where it is listed as Canceled by User If a pending job is deleted it is removed from the Print Queue and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs Queue where it is listed as a canceled job NOTE Only the owner of a job should delete the job Details displays additional programming information about the jobs in the Print Queue For held jobs the Details screen includes information about how to release the job Other Queues displays the other job queues available Page 8 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Completed Print Jobs Queue Item Name Type Owner Status Time completed Details Other Queues Print Maintains completed print jobs including Server F
228. n Services that can be defined in a template and the available parameters or options for each service These appear in the Services checkbox in a template Services Parameters Description File Scan to PaperPort Desktop Indicates that the template is used for scanning with the Visioneer PaperPort application Filing Destination Defines the address or path for the network location for scanned docu ment files Protocols Protocol in use on the network either TCP IP or NetWare Repository Type Public or private repository for scanned document files File Server IP Address TCP IP Server IP address and optional port number Server Name NetWare Name of the server Server Volume NetWare Netware Volume name NDS Context NetWare NDS context NDS Tree NetWare NDS tree Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 17 Internet Services Services Parameters Description Login Name Login name used to access the Fil ing location Path to Document NetWare Directory Path TCP IP This is the location where files will be transferred to on the server For Netware this can include an abso lute or relative NDS Context in addition to a volume name and directory path if the path to where the files are to be transferred is ina different NDS Context than the NDS Context of the Netware login Filing P
229. n the Internal Auditron is used with an External Control Device the External Control Device will take precedence over the Internal Auditron for that service The Auditron Setups are used initially to set up the Auditron accounts feature and job limits job completion procedures and periodically to gain access to account usage information Page 11 67 Setups Access to the Auditron Setups is controlled by a Personal Identification Number PIN and itis limited on the DC440 432 430 425 to users who have Auditron Administrator privileges and on the DC426 420 to users who have Owner privileges For further information about privileges please refer to Access Rights on page 11 86 Access Auditron Setups gt Select Access on the Control Panel Copy Output Please enter your password Collated J using the keypad to your right Uncollated J EES y 2 gt 1 Sided J 84x N gt 1x17 J Other J Other J A pop up window will be displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select on the Control Panel and use the number keypad to enter an Auditron Administrator PIN gt Select Enter in the pop up window gt Select Auditron Setups Additional ES Setups Machine Setups Copy Setups Fax Setups C Print Setups C Network Scanning SS Auditron Setups Page 11 68 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide
230. n the machine configuration Maintains pending and active jobs that are to be printed These include copy jobs network print jobs fax print jobs and report jobs Maintains all print jobs that have been successfully completed canceled by a user or canceled due to a fault Maintains all pending Embedded Fax transmission jobs including send broadcast send poll multi poll and any current active Embedded Fax jobs This queue will also include all Fax Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide scan jobs for delayed Embedded Fax jobs including send Mailbox and polling reservation Only outgoing Server Fax jobs will be displayed in this queue Completed Fax Jobs Queue Maintains all Fax jobs that have been successfully completed canceled by a user or canceled due to a fault Certain failed fax jobs will be maintained in the machine memory and available for re submission Inbound Server Fax jobs do not appear in the queue Scan Queue Maintains all active and pending Network Scanning and E mail jobs Completed Scan Jobs Queue Maintains all Network Scanning and E mail jobs that have 440 432 430 425 been successfully completed canceled by a user or canceled due a fault Machine Status button Displays information about the DC 440 432 430 426 425 420 G Select this button to confirm the paper supply review the status of faults and find information required for service calls NOTE Machine Status cannot
231. n the product Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Never remove covers or guards that require a tool for removal unless directed to do so in a Xerox approved maintenance kit Never defeat interlock switches Machines are designed to restrict operator access to unsafe areas Covers guards and interlock switches are provided to ensure that the machine will not operate with covers opened Do not put your hands into the fuser area located just inside the exit tray area as you may be burned Quality Standards The product is manufactured under a registered ISO9002 Quality system If you need additional safety information concerning the product or Xerox supplied materials you may call the following number 44 0 1707 353434 Safety Standards This Xerox product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety Standards listed Agency UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES Standard UL1950 3rd Edition Certification is based on reciprocity agreements which include requirements for Canada Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 9 About This Guide Regulatory Information FCC Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment genera
232. nabled together This allows users to select how they wish to login gt Select Network Authenticated Access and then select Enter EE Adjustment Format gt Enter the required login Network Authenticated Access hb Select the Enter button to type your login detai Is name and password OR gt Select Guest Access gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode gt Select Enter Changing the Authentication Service If previously configured by the System Administrator users may select alternative authentication environments gt If necessary select Network Authenticated Access gt Select Enter User Name Vicky The environment name that a iw Le 1 i Ly Lv LO Le LO 2 Gi appears inthe Change button CG J Col CH Col A G QJ CO Cc J e will vary depending on the network E JE JC cl LAlLal AL JO The example shown refers to a DNS Domain gt Select Change DNS Domain Change More Page 4 60 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax gt Select the required network environment gt Select Enter to continue IR ENG WC BGREAL COM gt Complete login to User Name and Password Jesse BGREAL COM __Jsaresnc BGREAL COM If required please contact the System Administrator for further assistance Logging Off gt Select Access A warning message will be pacs Y ooe Ez displayed Or
233. name gt or lt firstname lastname gt display behaviour is controlled by the LDAP server and not the Document Centre NOTE The LDAP configuration may also return other search results for example AndrewS for the same search query If a user has successfully logged into a device with Authentication enabled and LDAP configured the DC440 432 430 425 will attempt to automatically match the user s login name to their e mail address The user s e mail address will then be used to populate the From e mail address field This enables recipients of e mail jobs to identify the originator of the e mail job NOTE Users will not be able to change the user s From address if the user has logged in using Network Authenticated Access This prevents untraceable e mail jobs being sent from the Document Centre Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Image Adjustment Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel Select E mail Select Image Adjustment Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Use the Image Adjustment features to apply changes to the document being scanned NOTE If E mail is the default screen this tab will be called Added Features On selection it will change to Image Adjustment Refer to the following for more information Original Size page 7 8 Basic Image Quality page 7 9 Sides Imaged page 7 10 Stored Image Settings page 7 11 Erase page 7 12
234. nation Server Fax is based on the Network Scanning feature please refer to Network Scanning on page 6 1 for more information NOTE The System Administrator can restrict user access to Server Fax Please refer to Authentication Mode Server Fax on page 4 58 for more information or contact the System Administrator Please refer to the following steps on how to send a quick fax from the Document Centre using the standard features available within Server Fax NOTE LAN Fax and Server Fax cannot be installed at the same time Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Sending a Fax using Server Fax gt If necessary select Features to display the feature modes gt Select Clear All once to cancel any previous screen programming selections Selecting Clear All twice clears all the programming pathways and returns the machine to its default status gt If necessary select All Services gt Select Fax Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide OOC e Features Button Power Se yji Fax 1 Select Features Features Ob Status Clear All All S ervices 77 Image Page 4 45 gt The first Fax screen will be displayed Original Type Dialing EE EE EE 2 Load the documents gt Load documents face up in the Document Feeder or face down on the Document Glass Page 4 46 Xerox Document Centre 440 43
235. nd produces an output image with a background that is mostly white Lighten Darken Adjusts the brightness of the scanned images in relation to the lightness or darkness of the original paper document Sides Imaged Selects the number of sides single double sided to scan and how the pages are scanned Head to Head or Head to Toe Resolution Selects the dots per inch Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 19 Internet Services Page 9 20 Services Parameters Description Sharpness Selects the sharpness and clarity of the images on the document being scanned Image Size Sets the page dimensions for the input and scanned document file Original Size Select the dimensions of the input document The original size can be detected as auto pre set or cus tom Stored Size Set the dimensions of the output document Same as Original default auto matically creates an output image which matches the dimensions of the scanned document Pre Set specifies a standard sup ported size for the output docu ment Custom specify a unique size for the output document Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Services Parameters Description Reduce Enlarge Sets reduction or enlargement Selections are Auto automatically computes the proper size of the scaled image so that it can fit within the output doc
236. nds Silver Certificates United States Bonds Federal Reserve Notes Certificates of Deposit National Bank currency Federal Reserve Bank Notes Gold Certificates Treasure Notes Fractional Notes Paper money Bonds and obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA Bonds US Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds Internal Revenue Stamps lf it is necessary to copy a legal document on which there is a cancelled revenue stamp this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes Postage Stamps cancelled or uncanceled For philatelic purposes postage stamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is black and white and less than 3 4 or more than 1 1 2 times the linear dimensions of the original Postal Money Orders Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 17 About This Guide Bills checks or drafts for money drawn by or on authorized officers of the United States Stamps and other representatives of value of whatever denomination which may be or have been issued under any Act of Congress gt Adjusted compensation Certificates for veterans of the World Wars gt Obligations or Securities of any foreign government bank or corporation gt Copyrighted material unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the copying falls with
237. ne Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 7 Paper and other media T HINT If unwrapping a new packet of paper with the seam side CS of the packet face up turn the paper over when loading it in to the Bypass Tray This prevents curled output ty The Envelope Tray optional The Envelope Tray only fits in the Tray 1 position A maximum of 70 envelopes of 24lb substance 20 weight and any size envelope between 6 5 x 3 9 and 10 x 7 can be loaded Mailing envelopes must be at least 4 wide and between 6 and 9 5 long Reliable envelope sizes include 7 3 4 Reliable envelope styles include Standard Commercial NOTE Envelopes must only be copied single sided CAUTION To prevent unnecessary damage to a tray after it has been removed always make sure that it is placed or stored on a smooth surface for example a desk top NOTE The Envelope Tray can only be inserted in place of Tray 1 Page 10 8 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Pull open tray 1 and holding the tray on either side gently lift the tray and remove it from the machine gt Insert the envelope tray NOTE When the envelope tray is inserted the touch screen changes to display Envelope Tray Attributes Select Confirm to accept the size shown or select Change Envelope Size to change the size gt Adjust the guides in the tray to accommodate the size of the envelopes g
238. nennnnnenneneennenennnense 3 2 TC Load the doCuM ntsc avai kek 6 Se eek a tn thier a tn nn bu 3 2 2 Select the Features button iii 3 6 3 Select the f atures a aaa ed OR et dr AE 3 7 A Enter the Quantity sine nsssnnn A eee r dates aber tea ne n es Ee ds ed 3 8 Fy Sel ct Un EEN 3 9 6 Identify the copy job in the Print Queue ee eee eee eee e cee eeeeeteeeeteeteeeeees 3 9 Standard Features COPY 340 le 3 10 Sidas Magod EE 3 14 ele Ee EE 3 16 Paper Supply tin ane ni ne in ee tre 3 18 Image elt ie te ATs Reticle ada RE ee de Se 3 20 Added Features Copy snennnnnnnnsenenennenes 3 21 Image Adjustment tab COPY ssssssniininnrnneenennnnes 3 22 Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Original Input DC426 420 ee 3 22 Bo nd Originals EES 3 25 IMAGES SIT ur elie ea ea ate ce eet ale 3 27 Expert Image Quality sis 3 28 STEE 3 29 Edit Optional 52 755 nr era a A ade tbs 3 30 Output Format COPY ssmnnnnnnnsnnnenense 3 34 Transparencies wssecceesscsecdcegecenseetesccaccncteccccceegasazcaceetesscenceatestanececastasateatenstaceeds 3 34 N Up 2 Up DC426 420 iii 3 36 D AR LS LES Lia BEE 3 38 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide WIS CWT reich eee ee Ne res Ne Peer vire pes 3 42 Booklet Creation EE 3 44 Covers DC440 432 430 425 iii 3 45 Job Assembly COPY cstsieccceccesseccdccececthaceadacecdes cancvendeececacdhececdadueduedeacdensseeezeeance 3 48 B ild JOB eene
239. nitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made After connection the line monitor is removed sets a default volume for line monitoring as High Normal or Low Ee en ke Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 61 Setups Batch Send Transmits several pending documents to one destination during a single phone call gt Select Batch Send gt Select On to enable this feature or Off to switch this feature off Jee Type ke Monitor Jo E Pause Time D Batch Send E IS Redial Management CH Resend Count Resend Count Sets the number of attempts that can be made to automatically re transmit a failed page if a page error occurs gt Select Resend Count gt Select the number of attempts the machine should make to send a failed page Jens Type Je Monitor gt Select Save Ten Time ka Send A EHA J Redial Management m Resend Count Page 11 62 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Incoming Fax Options gt Access Fax Communication Setups as described on Fax Communication Setups on page 11 57 gt Select Incoming Fax Options gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows gt Make changes as required C Outgoing Fax Options Incoming Fax Options C Line Use Restriction gt Select Save Auto Answer Delay Sets the delay in secon
240. nt Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE The 2 sided options are not available on the DC425 single sided configuration 8 Orientation Select the Other option to access the Orientation features CCE 192 Select originals image orientation Original Copy Head to Head J Portrait J Head to Toe Landscape J 231 DC440 432 430 425 Select the Other option and then either 1 gt 2 2 gt 1and2 gt 2to access the following orientation options available Head to Head the output will be the same orientation as the documents Head to Toe the output will be rotated 180 on the second side Portrait the image appears in the portrait orientation Landscape the image appears in the landscape orientation The following illustration depicts the results for Head to Head or Head to Toe selections for Portrait and Landscape images Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 15 DC426 420 Reduce Enlarge Page 3 16 Portrait ImagesLandscape Images Head to Head Head to Head for binding on the long edge tor binding on the short edge Z IN ER E Head to Toe Head to Toe for binding on the short edge for binding on the long edge A A B B select the Other option and then 1 gt 2to access the following orientation options available Head to Head the output will be the same orientation as the documen
241. nt Setup in Reports amp Setups gt Select an empty line in the Comment List to enter the name s you want to Ee een A program cl Page 4 42 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Fax gt Select Next DC440 432 430 425 or Enter DC426 Change 420 to display the keypad If Change Cance save an incorrect entry is made report for month ES select the e button to WAYA backspace 999009009090 gt Enter the comment s ES x LC i Cell IERT Lal ICH IS i va gt Select Save and then Save again Transmit Header Print The Document Centre will automatically print the following information on the top of each page of an outgoing fax Machine ID number Company logo Destination name Date Time and Page number Use the following steps to switch this feature on gt Select Transmit Header Print feature in Reports amp Setups gt Select On and then Save Sea Off BU On Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 43 Server Fax Procedure 440 432 430 425 Quick Pathway Load documents Press Features If necessary select All Services Select Fax Page 4 44 Server Fax does not have any telephony capabilities documents are scanned and filed to a defined location where a Third Party Fax Server retrieves the document and forwards it to its final desti
242. ntial document password is required before transmission to a remote machine For example 1234567S4567 where as 1234567 is the telephone number and 4567 after the S is the password instructs the machine to check for validity which is also known as Secure Send The machine does not dial any number after the S Pulse to Tone Switch to switch between pulse and tone dialing Begin DTMF start a sequence of DTMF characters End DTMF end a sequence of DTMF characters Wait for network tone to suspend dialing until an expected network tone is detected detection W Or it can be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other services Local ID character check required as part of some international telephone numbers in place of 00 Local ID space character to improve readability For example adding spaces to a check telephone number as 1 234 5678 instead of 12345678 Keypad The keypad corresponds to the control panel telephone keypad buttons Page 4 54 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide More Fax Features Quick Pathway Select Features button on the control panel If necessary select Fax Select More Fax Features Lighter Darker gt Load the document gt Select More Fax Features gt Select Lighter Darker gt Use the scroll bars to increase or decrease the image adjustment gt Select Save and then Start Server Fa
243. ntrol panel If necessary select Copy Select Added Features The Added Features tab offers additional programming features for a copy job When selected a series of tabs is displayed Image Adjustment page 3 22 Output Format page 3 34 Job Assembly page 3 48 Copy Added Si ps All Sides Image Output Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply Imaged Quality Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto J Text J Uncollated J 1 gt 2 Sided J Auto J 84x10 j Auto J Stapled J 2 gt 2 Sided J 8 5 gt BY x14 J 8 x D j Photo J 2 gt 1 Sided J 84 x1 gt 1x17 J Nx 7 LW Other Other NOTE Only those features relevant to the machine configuration will be available Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 21 Copy Image Adjustment tab Copy gt Select Added Features The Image Adjustment screen will be displayed For more information about the features available refer to the following Original Size page 3 22 Bound Originals page 3 25 Image Shift page 3 27 Expert Image Quality page 3 28 Erase page 3 29 Edit optional page 3 30 Image Output Job Adjustment Format Assembly j Original Size Bound Originals Image Shift Auto a Off Expert Image Quality Erase fl Sharpness Normal Off Auto Exposure Off Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Original Input DC426 420 Page 3 22 Use this feature
244. o reset the counters for ALL ACCOUNTS to zero select Reset All Counters at the top of the screen All Accounts hdd Account gt Select Confirm pelete Account Press Confirm to reset all counters associated with all accounts gt Select Close to continue lodify Account Reset All Limits gt To reset the limits for ALL ACCOUNTS to zero select Stagen the Reset All Limits gt Select Confirm All Accounts hdd Account delete Account Press confirm to reset all Account Limits in all accounts gt Select Close lodify Account Delete All Accounts gt To delete ALL ACCOUNTS select Delete All TI loo Accounts gt Select Confirm hdd Account Press Confirm to delete all Account numbers delete Account gt Select Close lodify Account Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 73 Setups Job Limit Policy DC440 432 430 425 This feature sets machine behavior when the user s account limit has been reached When the limit is reached the machine will either stop the current job immediately or let the job finish and go over the limit gt Select Internal Auditron gt Select Job Limit Policy gt Select the preferred option see below for a description of cmt save each ai Terminate Immediately gt Select Save Terminate on Job Boundary Terminate Immediately the machine will stop the
245. o the machine at the factory and used by the machine when the user does not specify settings a computer that has a hard disk drive large enough to hold and share files It provides the ability for multiple users to simultaneously access the same file a setting that minimizes errors on telephone lines in areas of low quality communications or noise a device such as a magnetic card reader coin operated device or bill acceptor that is connected to the exterior of the machine and used to track machine usage a group of data sent through the network programming that enhances the image quality of a document beyond basic settings Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Group Dialing Halftone Head to Head Head to Toe Input Inserts IP Job Based Accounting JBA Job Monitor Key Operator Keypad LAN Fax Landscape Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide a form of abbreviated dialing that enables the dialing of multiple locations by entering one three character code The machine stores the image in memory and then transmits it to each location gray patterns that are not black or white a double sided document whereas the second side displays the image with the top of the document at the top of the page You typically turn over the page from the side edge a double sided document whereas the second side displays the image with the top of the document at the bottom of
246. ocument Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide If File Already Exists Allows the System Administrator to select the Filing Policy contained in the default template The Filing Policy determines how the scanned file will be stored in the repository and is referred to If File Already Exists on the Document Centre Confirmation Sheet The Confirmation Sheet prints a summary of details associated with the scanning and distribution of a Network Scanning job Update All Templates Applies the changes to all the templates Public Repository 1 2 3 4 Up to five public repositories can be set up These are the Default Repository and Repositories 1 2 3 and 4 These public repositories can be selected when a scan template is created The scan template for a public repository includes the name and the password required for access to the repository Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 95 Setups Print Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter the System Administrator PIN Select Print Setups Page 11 96 Print Setups options are set up by the System Administrator These setups and defaults are relevant to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 as a fully networked printer NOTE Refer to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide for more information Additional ca Setups C Machine Setups C Copy Setups C
247. ocument Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 51 Phonebook gt Select Phonebook or Send List gt Enter a fax number using the numeric keypad OR select the number from either list gt If required select Dialing Chars and add the characters to be stored with the fax number gt Select Add to Phonebook to store the number for future use OR Add to Send List to build the list of numbers for the current fax job HINT Selecting Start will automatically add the fax number to the Send List gt Select Save to exit or Cancel to remove the entries in the Send List Page 4 52 this is a list of saved fax numbers Once added Phonebook entries can only be edited by selecting Add to Phonebook or Delete Refer to the following steps for more information Fax More Fax Features E Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing Ding Gran See 82337 Add to Delet Add to Dialing Send List TT Phonebook Chars Phonebook Send List z ooo Ot 233 A 2 201 D D J el J og D 204 05 _2337 J EG Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide NOTE Save and Cancel only apply to fax numbers entered in o the Send List Phonebook entries are automatically saved when added Fax Dialing Characters Dialing characters are special characters that are used for entering fax numbers Dial
248. ol Panel and enter a PIN with Owner Privileges gt Select Enter in the pop up window NOTE The factory default password is 22222 This password is used initially prior to new PINs being assigned To prevent unauthorized access it is recommended you change this password Please contact your Xerox Service Representative for further assistance gt If necessary select Additional Setups C Machine Setups C Copy Setups O Fax Setups C Print Setups C Network Scanning Q Auditron Setups gt Select Access Rights System Auditron B Key Operator Administrator J Administrator DW SE User PIN A 5 DW Delete PIN J Add PIN Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 89 Setups Add Pin gt Select Add Pin gt Using the pop up keypad enter a number between 4 and 16 digits gt Select Save Set User Privileges gt Use the search facility or scroll buttons to select the user pin number for the user whose privileges are to be set or modified gt Select the desired button s to add or remove privileges Refer to page 11 87 fora description of each gt Select Confirm Page 11 90 EH GE a Y Auditron Administrator m Delete PIN DW Owner T Add PIN m Key Operator User PIN il PR Search System Administrator A Auditron fei Key Operator if Administrator E i User PIN LT ke el ke P
249. olicy Defines how to store scanned out put files Valid choices are Over write Append New Exact New Auto Generate Document Name Defines the folder name for Single Page TIFF image files or the name of the image for PDF or Multi Page Tiff Output Image Format DC440 432 430 425 Offers a choice of 3 formats PDF TIFF or TIFF Multi page Suppress Job Log This will cause the job log to not be transferred with the scanned data files Fax Immediate or Delayed Send fax now or at a specific time Fax Recipients Where the fax is sent to Phone Number Fax number of the recipient Phone List Add or delete fax numbers from the Document Centre phone list Page 9 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Services Parameters Description Print Number of Copies Defines how many copies to print Local Copy Staple if Finisher option is Staples the printed output available Scan Basic Selects scanned input and output document settings Original Type Type of document that is being scanned Selections are Auto the Document Centre auto matically determines the type of input document Text input documents that are pri marily composed of text line art or solid areas Photo input documents primarily composed of photos Auto Exposure Compensates for the low density quality of an original document a
250. ollow the instructions listed in this document to program the local ID and name Data Coupler Information This Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 machine contains an internal data coupler Its use is restricted by the FCC Federal Communications Commission To comply with the FCC rules you must carefully read and follow the instructions listed below This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number REN If requested provide this information to your telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the RENS of all devices should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should call your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 1 11 About This Guide Page 1 12 WARNING Ask your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on your line Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can severely damage telephone company equipment You not Xerox assume all responsibility and or liability for any damage caused by the connec
251. omatically deleted Postscript Setups The Postscript Setups feature allows the System Administrator to enable or disable an error sheet for postscript printing errors PCL Setups Allows the System Administrator to select and format the available PCL Resident Fonts Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 97 Setups Tower Mailbox Setups Allows users to be assigned to a specified bin There are 10 bins available Page 11 98 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide E mail Setups DC440 432 430 425 Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Conirol Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter the System Administrator PIN Select Additional Setups Select E mail Setups E mail is an optional feature available on a network connected DC440 432 430 425 When enabled this feature allows users to e mail to scan an original document convert the scanned document to an electronic format and then send that information to one or more e mail address destinations NOTE Refer to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide for more information Additional Setups Access Rights Setups C Service Access Control C E mail Setups Exit Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 99 Setups Page 11 100 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 12 Maintenance There will be times when the machine will req
252. on Administrator DC440 432 430 425 and Owner Access Rights Refer to Access Rights on page 11 86 for further information Access the Setup Tools When the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is delivered it contains a default password 22222 which can be used to provide access to the Setup Tools prior to PINs and Access Rights being assigned NOTE 22222 is the default System Administrator password on machine installation It is recommended you change this password Please contact your Xerox Service Representative for further assistance Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Access on PET the Control Panel Output PI t d gt A pop up window will be using the keypad to your right displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select on the Control Panel and use the number keypad to enter the default password 22222 gt Select Enter in the pop up window The following Screen is displayed and contains buttons for the types of setups available gt Select the button for the setups to be changed NOTE If necessary select Additional Setups to access the Setup feature required Ge B Q Copy Setups C Fax Setups Print Setups Network Scanning Q Auditron Setups gt Select Save or Cancel gt Select Exit to return to the Walkup Screen For more information about Network Scanning and Print Setup instructions please re
253. on against the paper Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 11 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation Misfeeds in the Bypass Tray gt Remove the paper and reload the tray Do not add paper to the tray when paper is already loaded Instead remove the paper combine the additional paper with the paper from the tray and reload the tray v Check the guides are correctly positioned around the paper loaded in the tray v When loading paper in the Bypass Tray the Change Attributes box is displayed If you change the media BUT do not change the attributes accordingly the machine might misfeed because it is trying to sense a size or type that is not loaded Check the attributes and run the job again v Jams in the Document Feeder Open the Document Feeder and check to see if any paper or objects are inside v Check to see if the top cover on the Document Feeder is firmly closed v Check documents If using computer fanfold forms ensure that the perforations down each side of the sheets have been removed When removed the forms can be loaded either short edge feed or long edge feed Page 13 12 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Jams in the stapler gt Remove the staple cartridge from the stapler and check the position of the first staple The staple should be lying flat against the met
254. once E mail has been installed on the machine e General this is where the transmission details are set up for outgoing messages e E mail Settings used to enter the E mail IP address This feature displays the properties related to Defaults and Message Content e LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Directory displays the properties related to the LDAP server e Public Address Book this feature is available when any Internet messaging service that uses machine stored addresses is installed on the machine Authentication Server DC440 432 430 425 This feature allows the System Administrator to set up the required network defaults and settings to support the e mail feature This feature will only be available once E mail has been installed on the machine e General displays the Authentication Type applied and its associated properties Stored Templates General Accesses the defaults for scan jobs e Append to Existing File the scanned document is added to the previously scanned files under the specified document folder Page 9 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Feature Name Action Services cont e Overwrite Existing File the scanned document overwrites the previously scanned files under the specified document folder e Do Not Save when scanning to file the newly scanned files are created under a new document folder that matches the document name
255. onnection to the telephone line There may be two telephone lines available on the DC440 432 430 425 the number 1 or 2 displayed next to this symbol indicates the telephone line being used If there is a problem transmitting the fax it will be recorded in the machine s Activity Report available in the Reports amp Setups tab and in the Completed Fax Jobs List in Job Status A status of Completed in the Fax Queue means the fax has been received but it does not mean it has been printed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 5 Page 4 6 The standard memory in the fax machine is 10 megabytes When memory fills up the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 switches to Immediate Send Mode In this case the image from each page is immediately transmitted and then deleted to make room for the next page NOTE If Immediate Send Mode is in use and the fax documents exceed the available memory on the transmitting machine a message will be displayed delete the job or select Resume to send documents already scanned If resume is selected another message will appear on completion advising the job be resent when more memory is available With either option it is recommended that the job be resent when more memory is available To obtain more memory on the machine reduce the resolution or send the job in text mode The Fax Transmission report contains information about the job and a reduced image of the first page in the set
256. ons NOTE If enabled the Printer Configuration Report will automatically print after the machine has been successfully powered up PostScript Font List lists the available PostScript fonts for the printer PCL Font List lists the available PCL fonts for the printer Account Information When the Auditron is enabled use this screen to review the limit and current count for your account number Counters Displays the total number of prints made on the machine Users can also review the counter for individual modes however if a mode is not installed on the machine the counters button for that mode will not be displayed for example if Fax is not installed the counters screen will not display a fax button On receipt of a Xerox meter card check that the serial number on the card matches that shown on the machine if the information is correct enter the Machine counter reading in the relevant box and return the pre paid card to Xerox Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Machine Status gt Select Reports amp Counters O Machine Paper Supply Reports amp Information Status Counters Account Information Print Reports gt Select Counters C Q Counters gt The Total Pages Printed billing counter for the machine will be displayed Enter this number on the o Machine DE meter reading card E DE ke gt To review the counter
257. options required gt Select Save Page 6 8 Auto Custom Standard Use to enter the size of the document when scanning from the Document Glass or the Document Feeder The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 uses this information to calculate the settings for the original size that you specify NOTE Auto is the default setting ae d x vee ke Bosco A 140 432mm 100 297mm A Praa owa Este ae Y leo ale Original Size Options accepts the machine s automatic size sensing The size detected will be matched to a standard size paper allows a non standard paper size to be defined This feature can only be used when a document is placed on the document glass To enter a value use the scroll bars or select the X or Y numeric box to display a pop up window and enter the value using the keypad displayed pre set document sizes available in the Paper Size list This feature can only be used when a document is placed on the document glass Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Basic Image Quality gt Select Basic Image Quality gt Select the options required gt Select Save LC CR FE bey Auto Exposure Lighter Darker Sharpness DC440 432 430 425 This feature adjusts the image quality settings applied to the scanned document Auto Exposure Lighter Darker Sharpness a i Auto Lighter a Soft a Normal Normal H On Darker Sharp Photo
258. or printing fax documents High Capacity Ready Machine Paper Information Status Status 1 Ready 2 Ready a Ready 4 Empty Bypass Empty Supply Reports amp Counters Ate 84x10 8 x ND 8 x ND 84x10 8 x ND Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard White White White White White White Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Faults Displays a list of the six most recent faults the date and time of the code and the status active or cleared Select the Fault Clearance Instructions button for assistance when clearing an active fault Machine Paper Supply Reports amp Information Status Counters No Code Date Time Status 1 N7 4 00 00 00 0 00 Cleared Fault Clearance Instructions Reports and Counters Print Reports Accesses the various reports available for printing Machine Paper Supply Reports amp Information Status Counters Account Information Print Reports S Counters Options Report DC 426 420 lists the options currently connected to the machine Pending Jobs Report lists the jobs that are still in memory and the available memory Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 21 Product Overview Page 2 22 Printer Configuration lists the status of the printer options installed options PCL options PostScript options and connectivity opti
259. ouch screen Q Q Refer to the following to alter an entry gt Select the required field on the touch screen gt Enter the information required using the displayed keyboard Select Save OR gt Select Edit Next Value to display the next available field NOTE Edit Next Value will not be available if only one entry appears in the template or if the last entry has been selected gt Select Save gt Select Start The job will now be scanned NOTE Any changes that are made using this feature are discarded after the Auto Clear timer expires or the Clear All button is selected If an attempt is made to submit another scan job with the same Document Management Fields entries then the previously entered data is automatically displayed to the user Refer to the following steps to manually change a Document Management Field entry Page 6 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Network Scanning gt Select Output Format gt Select Document Management Fields The current saved setting will be displayed gt If required select and change the options gt Select Save Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 21 Network Scanning Authentication Mode Network Scanning Authentication is used by the System Administrator to restrict user access to the features within E mail Network Scanning and Server Fax Services NOTE If Authen
260. page The application checks for the existence of the scanning username password and path Up to five public repositories 1 default and 4 additional can be defined After the repositories are set up they are available to users as choices when modifying templates Private repositories are not validated by Internet Services and therefore when defining private repositories the directory specified must exist on the file server or local drive Private repositories are specific to a particular template and can be defined by administrators on the Properties Services Stored Templates Default Template page or by users on the Services Stored Templates page When a template containing a private repository is selected by the user the correct user name and password to access that filing location must be entered at the Document Centre Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 15 Internet Services Template Pools Template Management Page 9 16 Template pools are directories where scanning templates reside With Internet Services an existing directory on a file server can be designated as a pool for DC440 432 430 426 425 420 templates Templates are used for scanning faxing or printing jobs at the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 control panel Users can select a template to use as is or use Internet Services to create a brand new one or modify an existing one The following three buttons are used to manage te
261. per size is not selected the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 defaults to the size it senses from the document and sends the output to the Center Tray Presets displays the most regularly used paper supply options The presets are set up by the Key Operator Other displays a list of all the trays and the paper type color size and orientation loaded Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 19 Copy Image Quality Text Auto Photo Lighter Darker scroll bar Page 3 20 Use the image quality settings to adjust the quality of the output Image Quality options used for scanning text solids line art and halftones automatically adjusts the image quality based on the attributes of the document Auto can also be used to make copies of documents that contain halftones and different images used for scanning continuous tone photographs and high quality high frequency halftones HINT For best results copy a maximum of 5 photographs in one job unless the machine has additional memory allows manual adjustment to be made to the lightness and darkness of the output EW Copy Added see All Sides Imaged Image Quality Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto J Text Gs a gt CG Cte Co CS SF ES Scroll bar Output Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Added Features Copy Quick Pathway Select Features on the co
262. plate within Network Scanning Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Public and Private Templates Public Repository Private Repository gt Load the documents in the Document Feeder or place on the Document Glass gt Select All Services and then Network Scanning gt Select Refresh List to update the template list gt Select the template required If the template has been configured with a Public Repository gt Select Start The job will be scanned an electronic file created and the file sent to the destination as specified in the chosen template Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide A template can contain either a public or private filing location or repository If a user selects a template that contains a public filing location the scan job will be filed to that location without the user having to enter a password to access the filing location If a user selects a template that contains a private filing location a password must be entered for that job to be successfully filed NOTE If a template containing a private filing location is selected and a password has not been entered then a pop up reminder will be displayed when Start is selected Ewe Network Scanning Image Output All Adjustment Format Services 7 defaultxst defaultxst ken List A j Directory 13 210 230 1 sv2 330 Refresh Template Document
263. ply to address to delete the selected address to delete all the addresses A confirmation pop up message will be displayed Using the Address Books Page 7 4 The DC440 432 430 425 is able to support two types of e mail address books When an entry is made in the To From CC or Bccthe Address Book displays search results for either or both configured address books If both address books are configured users can select the Change Address Book button to submit the search in the other address book Please refer to the following pages for more information about the Public Address Book and Internal Address Book Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Public Address Book Change Name Jane Smith Smith Jane A E mail Address Jane Smith main com Smith James Smith Joan Smith John Smith Joshua Smith Katherine Stores external company addresses on the machine Created by the System Administrator within Internet Services The DC440 432 430 425 will accept a Public Address Book file that contains a list of user names and their e mail addresses This file must be of the CSV Comma Separated Values format for the device to be able to read the file contents NOTE The majority of word processing packages will allow you to create a CSV file A selection of e mail applications will also allow you to export a list of users in the CSV file format The completed file is imported to the device v
264. pop up have not been assigned Refer to Access Rights on page 11 86 for more information KEES A4 A3 rs 84 xD CLEC Se Co lu Co ES window gt Select Machine Setups Additional ES Setups C Machine Setups Q Copy Setups Fax Setups C Print Setups Network Scanning O Auditron Setups gt The Machine Setups screen is displayed Additional ose Setups NOTE Additional Setups Popor Trays Date Time Walkup Screen accesses more Machine Setup C Q features Select this button if Timers Contention Localisation the feature required is not O C displayed on the initial Machine Setups screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 7 Setups Paper Tray Setups gt Select Paper Trays gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows gt Make changes as required gt Select Save Page 11 8 Default Tray Tray Priority Auto Tray Switching Default Warning Setting both Copy Tray Setups Reduce Enlarge and 4 Machine Setups Paper Supply to Tray Auto will cause improper machine E Priority Auto behavior Check these settings y before Exiting Setups Auto Tray Switching Select the scroll buttons to select the paper supply default setting the list contains only the paper trays available with the machine configuration The chosen setting will be displayed
265. prior to other selections made by the user If Auto is selected as the default setting the paper tray is selected automatically to match the size and orientation of the originals Select the order in which the machine searches the trays for available media To change the settings assign a priority to each tray Number 1 is the highest priority and depending on how many trays are available 4 5 or 6 will represent the lowest priority Each number can only be assigned once NOTE This feature is not available on single tray configurations Use the scroll buttons to select or de select this feature On sets the machine to automatically switch to another paper tray when the selected tray is out of paper Another tray must contain paper of the same size type and orientation for automatic switching to occur To de select this feature select Off Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Date Time Setup gt Select Date Time gt Select Date Setup gt Select the scroll buttons to select the preferred display format for example the mm dd yy format would display 06 10 01 for a current date of 10th June 2001 gt Use the scroll buttons to select the current month mm day dd and year yy gt Select Save Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Date CE Setup Q Setup Current Date 12 21 98 a 4 y D Month A Day a A Y Date Form
266. ptional component on the DC425 single sided configuration Paper Tray 2 426 420 Similar to Tray 1 these trays can hold a maximum of 500 Paper Trays 3 amp 4 DC432 430 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper Refer to Paper and other 425 media on page 10 1 for more information Page 2 4 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide _ Envelope Tray High Capacity Feeder HCF Finisher Tower Mailbox Convenience Shelf Convenience Stapler Enables the printing of addresses on envelopes as an alternative to using labels It can hold a maximum of 70 envelopes of 24lb substance 24 paper at one time The envelope tray can only be used in place of tray 1 Refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 for more information This tray is located on the left side of the machine under the Bypass Tray and Finisher or Left Tray The tray can hold a maximum of 2000 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed Refer to Paper and other media on page 10 1 for more information The Finisher can stack a variety of paper sizes from 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 through 11 x 17 and can handle a maximum of 1000 sheets of 20lb substance 20 paper at one time It can staple up to 50 pages of 20lb substance 20 paper in one set Refer to Output on page 3 10 for more information NOTE The Finisher Stand or the High Capacity Feeder must also be fitted with the Finisher The Tower Mailbox is
267. pying faxing scanning or printing a job The touch screen is visible and ready to be programmed Low Power Mode As delivered the machine automatically switches into Low Power Mode 15 minutes after the last copy print out In this mode the touch screen is blank and the Power Save Indicator light is on The machine is re activated if the touch screen or any button onthe control panel is touched the document feeder is loaded a paper tray opened a job is submitted to the print queue fax receive or network print or a fax or print job arrives in the print queue The machine responds within one second and all the features are available within 30 seconds The factory default setting of 15 minutes is customer changeable within the range of 5 to 240 minutes For more information refer to Changing the Default Time Settings on page 2 12 Power Save Mode Auto Off Sleep As delivered the machine automatically switches into Power Save Auto Off Sleep Mode 60 minutes after the last copy print out In this mode the copier version of the DC 426 420 switches the Power ON OFF switch to the off position Any stored jobs remain in the memory and the DC 426 420 returns to an operational condition when powered ON In Power Save Auto Off Sleep Mode on the copier printer fax version of the DC 426 420 and all DC 440 432 430 425 configurations the touch screen is blank and the Power Save light is lit The machine is re activated if the to
268. r Y numeric box to display a pop up window and enter the value using the keypad displayed pre set document sizes available in the Select Size list Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Delayed Start Fax This feature allows a user to choose a time within the next 24 hours at which a fax will be sent IMPORTANT The time to send is added to the job information sent to the Fax Server with the scanned image The Third Party Fax Server retains the fax for sending at this time gt Load the document gt Select More Fax Features gt Select Delayed Start gt Select ON the options will J Current Time a 4 Ja 12 16 ES D Le be displayed P Hours Y Minutes y ii gt Use the up down scroll o1 12 00 59 arrows to indicate the start hour start minutes and AM PM gt Select Save and then Start NOTE This feature can be set as a 12 hour or 24 hour clock NOTE When enabled the default start time is 9 00PM Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 57 Authentication Mode Server Fax Authentication is used by the System Administrator to restrict user access to the features within E mail Network Scanning and Server Fax NOTE If Authentication has been enabled it will be enabled for all three services The following steps may vary depending on the authentication mode set up by the System Administrator Please contact the Syste
269. r example if you want a fax to print on blue paper and the Key Operator has disabled fax printing on blue paper you cannot use it unless the Key Operator enables fax printing on that specific type of paper Contact the Key Operator and make sure that the Junk Fax feature is not enabled in the Fax Communications setups v A fax will not print it is marked Heldin the gt Check Paper Supply Status in Machine Fax Queue Status to see if the paper in the paper tray is fax enabled If it is not enabled contact the Key Operator For example if the Key Operator enabled only blue 8 1 2 x 11 paper for fax jobs the machine prints fax jobs only on blue paper Or the Key Operator might want to set up the machine so fax documents do not print on letterhead paper Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 15 Problem Solving Fault Codes and Messages During a fault the touch screen displays a message on how to clear the fault Some faults indicate customer maintenance while others require the attention of the Key Operator The following table represents some of the fault codes and their corresponding corrective actions that may appear in the Print Queue or Faults List available in the Machine Status mode Table of Fault Codes Code Description and Corrective Action 4A51 Document Feeder jam Open the top cover of the Document Feeder and remove any paper or objects 4B71
270. r receptacle Your equipment is equipped with an energy saving device to conserve power when the machine is not in use The machine may be left on continuously Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Always use materials specifically designated for this product Use of other materials may result in poor performance and could create a hazardous situation Do not use aerosol cleaners Follow the instructions in this User Guide for proper cleaning methods Never use supplies or cleaning materials for purposes other than those for which they were intended Keep all supplies and materials out of reach of children Do not use this product near water wet locations or outdoors Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing personal injury or serious damage to the product Slots and Openings in the cabinet and in the back and sides of the product are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or covered The product should never be located near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Never push objects of any kind into the slots of the product as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind o
271. rapped and boxed until ready to be used Re wrap partly used packages of paper NOTE Paper should not be stored in the paper trays Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Other media A variety of media types can be used in the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Check the following table for special considerations NOTE Although 16 24lb substance 16 24 bond paper is an acceptable weight the machine might experience a problem with paper curl when feeding lightweight paper Whenever possible use 20lb 24lb substance 20 24 bond paper Media Uses and Special Considerations Media Use Specifications 4 13 x 5 83 Postcards small forms Trays 1 2 3 4 do not use Postcard Paper in these trays NOTE paper should e Bypass Tray load SEF not be fed to the postcards cannot be duplexed To print on both sides feed paper through the Bypass Tray then turn the paper over and feed through the Bypass Tray again to print on the second side e High Capacity Feeder do not use in this tray Finisher or the Mailbox Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 13 Paper and other media Media Use Specifications 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Billing account e Tray 1 load LEF 500 sheets Statement Paper statements maximum 20lb substance 20 paper e Trays 2 3 4 do not use in these trays e Bypass Tray load LEF 50 sheets maximum 20Ib substance 20
272. rd features copy 10 standard features e mail 2 standard features internet services 2 standard features server fax 48 standard features server fax 44 stand by mode 11 stapling 12 xiii Xiv automatic stapling internet services 16 finisher 12 template operations internet convenience stapler 13 services 23 manual stapling finishertemplate pools internet 12 services 16 stapling copy 12 template services internet start button 24 services 17 status tab internet services 7 template summary internet store for polling fax 27 services 16 store to mailbox fax 30 time setup 10 stored image setting options e timers setup 11 mail 11 tools stored image setting options access setups 4 network scanning 12 auditron administrator 3 stored image settings e mail changing the settings 4 11 key operator 2 stored image settings network owner 4 scanning 12 system administrator 3 stored jobs copy 50 touch screen contrast setup 16 storing a copy job 50 tower mailbox 5 supplies 2 tower mailbox setups 98 system controls 24 tower mailbox specifications 7 access button 24 transmission report setup 49 asterisk button 24 transmission report fax 20 clear all button 24 transparencies copy 34 clear button 24 transparency options copy 36 dial pause button 24 U hash button 24 uncollated output copy 11 help button 24 update all templates setup 95 interrupt button 24 user documentation 28 language button 24 using media print 2
273. re 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Media Use Specifications Tabbed paper Pages that have extended tabs to sepa rate pages Trays 1 2 3 4 do not use in these trays Bypass Tray load a maximum of 10 tabbed sheets LEF with the tabs on the outside High Capacity Feeder do not use in this tray Envelopes Refer to page 10 8 for more information For mailings High Capacity Feeder Trays 1 2 3 4 and Bypass Tray do not use in these trays Envelope Tray replaces Tray 1 load with the opening facing down The gummed edge should be on the trail edge Inserts colored stock standard size Dividers Trays 1 2 3 4 load SEF or LEF 500 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper Bypass Tray load SEF or LEF 50 sheets maximum 20lb substance 20 paper High Capacity Feeder load LEF seam side down Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 17 Paper and other media Media Use Specifications 8 12 16 and 24 up Self adhesive labels for e Trays 1 2 3 4 load LEF or Xerox labels 33 up envelopes and packag SEF face up labels may not give ing e Bypass Tray load LEF or maximum SEF face down performance and are e High Capacity Feeder oad not recommended LEF face down HINT For maximum performance it is recommended that labels should only be loaded into the paper trays when required On completion of the job t
274. re installed but one is set to receive only port line designation is not available The selection of lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt will not be available in the dialing characters list The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 does not have a handset connected It is On hook as indicated on the touch screen If an external telephone is connected the machine will indicate Off hook when the handset is lifted from the telephone If the recipient of the fax does not have a dedicated telephone line use manual dialing Use the following options to dial a fax number manually used to send a fax used to enter the fax number that contains confidential numbers for example a credit card number to receive a fax to switch between pulse and touch tone dialing Valid pulse mode dialing characters are numbers 1 through 9 and 0 Valid tone or Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF mode characters are numbers 1 through 9 0 and Dialing characters are different from the alphabet characters on the dialing keypad They are available only through a special character keypad Select the special character keypad from the touch screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Keypad The keypad corresponds to the control panel telephone keypad buttons Speed Dial Entering a telephone number into the dial directory automatically establishes it as a speed dial number a short cut version for quick dialing Instead of entering the entire number
275. reset once the guide is correctly in place Rear guide gt Make sure that the guides S Side guide lock tightly into place If the paper is not firmly against the sides of the paper tray and the guides paper jams may occur Page 10 4 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Referring to the tray labels load the paper neatly into the tray An arrow is imprinted in the left front corner of each paper tray Place one corner of the stack of paper tightly into the corner of the tray covering the arrow gt Take care not to fill above the maximum fill line gt If the paper tray guides have been moved slide the guides so that they are just touching the paper loaded in the tray gt Close the paper tray gt Select Confirm in the Tray Attributes window NOTE If loading a different paper type or color reprogram the features as required in Change Attributes Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 5 NOTE Although paper does not have to be loaded in the same orientation as the documents the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 runs at a slightly slower speed when jobs require rotation Paper and other media The Bypass Tray Page 10 6 Paper can be loaded either short edge feed or long edge feed however the default orientation is long edge feed Long Edge Feed LEF Short Edge Feed SEF NOTE Mixing paper standards can lead to image loss Th
276. riginals DC426 8 420 The Document Centre can automatically sense mixed size originals Use this feature to fax a set of mixed size documents using the Document Feeder gt Load the documents face up in to the document feeder CES gt Select More Features Auto gt Select Advanced LJ Features LJ Original Size gt On the DC440 432 430 425 EZ un Se select Original Size On the DC426 420 select Mixed Size gt On the DC440 432 430 425 select Save On the DC426 420 select On and then Save gt Select Start Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 33 Reports amp Setups Embedded Fax Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel If necessary select the Fax Select More Features Select Reports amp Setups gt Select More Features gt Select Reports and Setups Page 4 34 Use the Reports and Setups tab to print various reports set up directories store comments and other specifications For more information about the features available refer to the following Fax Reports page 4 35 Answer Mode page 4 36 Dial Directory Setup page 4 37 Comment Setup page 4 42 Transmit Header Print DC440 432 430 425 page 4 43 fap Fax Advanced Reports amp Features Setups A Fax Reports nswer Mode Dial Directory Setup C eS Auto Answer C Comment Setup Transmit Header Print On Xerox Docu
277. ront of the cartridge CAUTION To avoid spills do not remove the sealing tape until the Copy Print Cartridge is completely in place gt Close the Left Front Cover NOTE The Left Front Cover will not close if the cartridge is not completely in place gt Close the Upper Left Cover IF FITTED gt Close the Duplex Module gt Slide the Finisher and High Capacity Feeder back in to place Page 12 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide CAUTION Occasionally after the Copy Print Cartridge is replaced the first page printed is blank This is because the roller has not yet turned over to distribute fresh dry ink If this happens reprint the job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 11 Maintenance Loading Staples Finisher optional The Finisher contains an automatic stapler Staple cartridges contain 5000 staples To replace the cartridge gt Press and hold the button on top of the Finisher to lower the Finisher Tray Page 12 12 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt The staple cartridge is located inside the small door which has a staple imprinted on the outside Pull open the door towards you gt Take hold of the cartridge as shown gt Gently pull out the cartridge and dispose of the unit Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 13 Maintenance gt Unpack the new
278. rox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Dialling Digits Reporting DC440 432 430 425 Setups This default selects whether the first or the last 20 digits of a telephone number are displayed on reports and headers gt Select Dialling Digits Reporting Local ID Dereye Start First 20 digits m Local Name DW Long Document D 20 digits LJ Company Logo Dialing Digits Reporting gt Select the preferred option gt Select Save Save Delayed Start Local ID J T one a First 20 digits PS Local Name J Long Document m Last 20 digits T Company Logo E Dialing Digits Reporting Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 43 Fax Printing Options gt Select Receive Reduction gt Select Auto or Off as required gt Select Page Margin gt Use the scroll buttons to select the required margin Page 11 44 gt Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on Fax Terminal Setups on page 11 37 gt Select Fax Printing Options Receive Reduction With this feature enabled the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 automatically determines the required reduce enlarge ratio for printing on the selected paper E Receive Reduction m Paper Attributes T Auto at Page Margin DW Output Selection M J Duplex Printing Page Margin This feature defines the maximum amount of space between the length of an incoming fax and the length of the paper on which th
279. rt Off Border Erase Edge Erase Edit optional Page 3 30 apart 2in kk 2 Margin we S al gi O 2in ke Side 1 Ble les 5 Erase options the feature is not available to erase equal amounts from all edges up to 2 in to erase a specific amount from each edge of the copy Up to 2 in can be applied to each edge Use the Editing Kit to change the appearance of a document copy The kit is supplied with an orange editing marker Markers other than the one supplied can be used NOTE When editing keep the Document Glass closed unless editing a bound document or using the Original Size feature Do not select Interrupt or Pause while scanning a document HINT The Editing feature will not function if the original is not white for example when using recycled paper or colored originals If the Editing feature is not working properly or if the edit marks are not dark replace the orange marker Also avoid placing edit marks within approximately 1 4 of an inch of the edge of the document Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide DC440 432 430 425 DC426 420 gt To protect the document make a copy first gt Use the orange editing marker draw around the areas to be printed or draw a thick line through the areas Press firmly on the edit marker The line indicating the area to be printed must be dark without any breaks NOTE There is no limit to the number
280. rty Server different entries might be displayed for Server Fax jobs Type the type of job For example Copy Fax Print or Proof Print NOTE Server Fax print jobs will be reported as Fax Receive Owner _ if this feature is enabled the column will show the name of the person who submitted the job For walk up jobs the default name displayed is local For Embedded Fax jobs no owner name is displayed For Server Fax jobs an owner name will be displayed For LAN Fax jobs it will be the person who submitted the job Status information about the progress of a job such as printing scanning formatting Priority identifies the printing priority assigned to the job type Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage jobs When a toolbar button is selected a pop up window is displayed Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested action Promote moves a job ahead of all other jobs that have the same status and priority Only jobs with a Pending or Held status can be promoted H more than one job with the same priority is promoted the jobs will be arranged in first in first out order Jobs can be promoted at any time NOTE It is recommended that jobs are only promoted in an emergency Page 3 54 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Release removes the selected job from memory and completes it as instructed Jobs are held due to missing resources For example embedded fax print sample set
281. s gt Select Add Account gt Enter the new account Downoad Reset All number between 4 and 16 gene am digits long using the pop up Copy oC ojo keypad yp Account Number Modify Account gt Select Save A Search Add Account gt Select Close to exit m C Page 11 78 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select the services required for this account gt Make other selections for this account as required see below gt Select Save and then Close Scroll buttons Unlimited Reset Count Delete Account Modify Account Clear Counters Reset All Accounts Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Copy Count Setup OO Fax Send Count Setup Download Reset All Close All Accounts Accounts Count Limit L om Count Limit C oC om Account Number CA Clear mmm LE Cen J Search y ai Delete Account C Add Account Copy Fax a new limit can be entered to restrict the number of prints which can be assigned to this account there is no limit on the number of prints that can be assigned to this account the counters for this account will be reset to zero HINT the selected account will be deleted displays the services and copy limits for the selected account resets counters for the selected account to zero resets counters for ALL ACCOUNTS to zero Page 11 79 Se
282. s Gray Scale Copying DC426 420 Auto Exposure Erase gt Load the documents in the same orientation as the selected Paper Tray gt Select the features required gt Select Added Features gt Select Image Adjustment gt Select Erase Expert Image Quality options adjusts the sharpness of the image This feature is used to increase the sharpness of fine lines and details or to decrease the sharpness for a smooth uniform appearance However it is advisable not to decrease the sharpness too much the copy might appear distorted Normal is the default setting use when copying documents containing highlights and shadows This option provides better reproduction of graylevels Images tend to be sharper and have less contrast NOTE 1 gt 2 22 Transparencies 2 Up Booklet Creation Build Job or Annotation cannot be used with Gray Scale Copying when copying text images from colored paper documents this feature enables users to obtain a copy with a clean white background Use this feature to erase unwanted marks such as hole punch impressions from the edge of the copy pernan cnt ser m D Border Erase a Edge Erase Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 29 Copy gt Select Border Erase or Edge Erase gt Use the scroll arrows to enter the amount of erase required gt Select Save gt Enter the quantity and select Sta
283. s 69 auto answer delay 63 auto clear 12 batch send 62 border erase 32 broadcast amp multi poll reports 48 changing the settings 4 communication mode 52 company logo 40 confirmation sheet 95 contention 13 copy setups 25 customer support number 16 date 9 date time 9 default repository 94 delayed start time 41 delete account 72 delete all accounts 73 dialling digits reporting 43 duplex printing 45 edge erase 33 embedded fax 37 erase 32 expert image quality 31 failed fax files DC420 56 fault override 19 fax communication setups 57 fax file management 55 fax mailboxes 53 fax panel defaults 50 fax printing options 44 fax report options 47 fax setups 34 fax terminal options 38 files for polling 56 if file already exists 95 image quality 28 incoming fax options 63 internal auditron 69 interrupt button 14 job completion DC420 80 job limit policy 74 job template pool 94 junk fax prevention 64 key operator tools 2 lighter darker 51 line monitor 61 line use restriction 66 local ID 38 low power mode 12 machine serial number 17 machine setups 6 mailbox add edit 54 mailbox delete 55 mailbox files 56 mailbox files DC440 432 56 mailbox report 50 margin shift 31 original type 51 output defaults 29 output selection 46 owner tools 4 page margin 44 paper attributes 46 paper sizes 17 paper trays 8 pause time 59 pcl setups 97 port setup 96 postscript setups 97 power save mode 1
284. s along the top to access further options gt Select Enter The address will appear in the Address List refer to example gt Repeat the above steps as required for Cc Bcc From and Edit Subject NOTE The From address cannot be changed if E mail has been accessed via the Authentication Mode gt Select Start to scan the original and send the e mail Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Using the touch screen keypad users are able to enter e mail addresses manually on the Document Centre Address List Details J Bcc J Remove All J Subject FPE To smith main com To smith main com ES YC IES HE HE EE UE EE WE SY EES E WE E E E ECH SC EZ E g All Services 7 Adjustment Address List r jf A Remove All Edit Sub ject Subject Office Organisation Page 7 3 E mail Details Remove Remove All Once an entry appears in the Address List users are able to select to display the recipient address details and From addresses NOTE The Address information displayed is determined by how the address was originally added to the Address List from the Internal Address Book Public Address Book or entered manually Refer to Using the Address Books on page 7 4 for more information about Address Books HINT When selecting a From entry a user can select the Reply to button to edit the Re
285. s detected in the power supply to the Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 a Ground Fault Interrupter GFI device on the machine automatically removes all electrical power If power is interrupted locate the GFI on the right side of the machine towards the back If the GFI has been activated on the DC426 420 the switch will be in the down position on the DC440 432 430 425 the switch will be in the left position Flip the switch to restore power to the machine DC 426 420 DC440 432 430 425 If the GFI interrupts power to the machine again or if power has not been restored by this procedure call your Xerox service representative Page 1 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 2 Product Overview The Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 is not simply a conventional copier It is a digital device capable of being used for copying faxing printing and scanning dependent on the configuration For more information on available options contact the local Xerox representative The graphic representations of the touch screen throughout this User Guide are based on a fully configured Document Centre 440 432 430 425 with the Copy mode as the default The appearance of the touch screens may differ slightly on other models or configurations However feature descriptions and functionality as described remain the same NOTE The available features are dependant on the model and
286. s feature to automatically generate a Cover Letter for an out going fax gt Select More Features and then Cover Letter gt Select On The Comment ETES Comment List List will be displayed To Comment O1 report for month Jo a report for month gt Select To Comment and select the recipients name P J From Comment from the list The name appears under To Comment gt Select From Comment and then the senders name from the list The name appears under the From Comment gt Select Save The Cover Letter contains the following information NOTE Except for the To and From comments the following are automatically inserted Refer to Comment Setup on page 4 42 for information about setting up a comment A Fax cover letter title The name or telephone number of the remote terminal If the fax number has been entered manually instead of using the Dial Directory the first line of the To commentis blank The To comment recipient s name The local name The From comment sender s name The telephone number for the local or sending terminal The number of pages not including the cover page Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 19 The date month day and year and time hours and minutes Transmission Report When selected this feature prints a confirmation of the transmission for each fax sent from the machine The
287. s in the template Ts HINT Templates that will Fax and Print Local Copy can be z selected using this feature Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 27 Internet Services Problem Solving Page 9 28 Refer to the following questions if experiencing a problem using Internet Services For further assistance contact the System Administrator gt Are you using the correct browser version gt Did you enter the correct IP address for the Document Centre in the browser gt Is the Document Centre filtered or blocked on the network gt Is the Document Centre inside a firewall gt Is the Document Centre configured for HTTP NOTE If the network is experiencing connection performance problems do not use the proxy server Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 10 Paper and other media The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is designed to use a variety of types of paper and other media This chapter offers information about loading paper and other types of media into the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 as well as recommending the different types of paper and media that can be loaded in to the various paper trays on the machine Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 1 Paper and other media Loading paper When a paper tray is opened the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 assumes more paper is to be loaded The touch screen displays a pop up window giving the option to ch
288. s used by the System Administrator to restrict user access to the features within E mail Network Scanning and Server Fax Services NOTE If Authentication has been enabled it will be enabled for all three services The following steps may vary depending on the authentication mode set up by the System Administrator Please contact the System Administrator for further assistance Login Guest Access A login passcode is required gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode Steak Scanning Adjustment Format gt Select Enter Guest Access Provide a login passcode Type passcode using the keypad to the right then select Enter EEE SS Enter Page 7 14 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Login Network Authenticated Access gt Select Enter gt Using the keyboard enter the network user name NOTE Select More Characters if required gt Select Enter gt Enter the network password gt Select Enter NOTE Select More Characters if required A pop up message will be displayed The machine is now processing the log in request Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide A login name and password are required Image Adjustment Ewe Network Scanning Output Format All Services 7 Network Authenticated Access Select the Enter button to type your login name and password C Enter Change g More D
289. second side of each page is rotated 180 therefore the top of the document on the second side is at the bottom of the page If available select either Portrait or Landscape The following illustration depicts the results for Head to Head or Head to Toe selections for Portrait and Landscape images Portrait Images Landscape Images Head to Head for binding on the long edge Z N A Head to Toe for binding on the short edge Head to Head or binding on the short edge TIRA Head to Toe or binding on the long edge A A B Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Expert Image Quality gt Select Expert Image Quality gt Select the default required a petous canci save description of each follows Sharpness Auto Exposure gt Select Save J D D Normal ES On Sharpness adjusts the sharpness of the image select the preferred setting Grayscale Copying DC426 provides improved reproduction of gray levels select On or 420 Off Auto Exposure select a default setting of On to enhance documents with colored backgrounds or Off to disable this feature Margin Shift DC440 432 430 425 Programs the default amount of Margin Shift to move the image up down or side to side on one or both sides of a page Margin Shift can be applied to side one and side two of a page gt Select Margin Shift gt Sel
290. selected Templates specify a file location in either a Netware or TCP IP network The Output Format tab will display options for either a Netware or TCP IP filing location NOTE The following screens relate to using Netware and will vary slightly for TCP IP Epfe Network Image Output All Scanning Adjustment Format Services 7 Server IP Address Document Path Document Name ES 132102301 SH fey2 330 C NETSCAN If File Already Exists Document Management Login Name Password C netscan SS Overwrite Existing File Fields Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Server IP Address Server Name For TCP IP enter the server IP address For NetWare enter the server name tree and context NOTE Tree and Context are required for Netware NDS environments For TCP IP users may specify an optional port number with the filing location IP address For example to specify filing to an IP port of 1026 enter 113 210 228 1 1026 NOTE The FTP server where the filing occurs will need to be configured to accept this job over port 1026 for this scan to be successful RE HINT For scan jobs over TCP IP the default port 21 is automatically used Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 15 Network Scanning Document Path Volume This feature specifies the location of the directory path where the scanned document will be placed For TCP IP enter the Document Path For Netware
291. specified in the template s File service e Rename New File when scanning to file the new document is given a generated name that is derived from the date and time stamp of the file server Repository Setup Selects a file server repository for configura tion Template Pool Setup Used to set up a server for the template pool Default Template Provides a basic format and options for scanned printed or faxed documents System Administrators can modify the default templates The settings defined here are the defaults for the user templates that are selected in Services Stored Templates Print Setup Specifies the printing defaults for the Document Centre Server Fax Setup DC440 432 430 425 Enables the System Administrator to set up the Fax Repository from the Web Accessories Only available if the Tower Mailbox is fitted as an accessory to the Document Centre Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 11 Internet Services Feature Name Action Portfolio Contains the Document Centre service infor mation Xerox and system contact information the Document Centre profile fault history and billing meters are also included here Page 9 12 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Maintenance Tab Maintenance provides a way to view and test printer functions on the Document Centre gt Select Maintenance and the op
292. st be loaded in to the Document Feeder NOTE The lead edges must have the same dimensions For example 11 x 17 short edge feed can be loaded with 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed but 11 x 17 short edge feed cannot be loaded with 8 1 2 x 11 short edge feed Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 23 Copy To produce size for size copies gt Load the documents gt Select Auto paper supply gt Select Added Features gt Select Original Size gt Select Mixed Size and select Save gt Enter the quantity and select Start NOTE nserts Booklet Creation and N Up 2 Up on the DC426 420 cannot be used with Mixed Size Originals Page 3 24 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Bound Originals gt Place the bound document face down on to the document glass Close the cover until it rests on the bound document Do not force it shut Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 3 25 To produce reduced enlarged copies gt Load the documents gt Select the paper size required gt Select Added Features gt Select Original Size gt Select Mixed Size and select Save gt Enter the quantity and select Start NOTE nserts Booklet Creation and N Up cannot be used with Mixed Size Originals Select Bound Originals to make copies of pages from bound documents or magazines using the Document Glass
293. stapling 12 documentation 6 finisher manual stapling 12 inserting a new copy print finisher specifications 6 cartridge 9 forced 4800 DC420 setup 52 inserts copy 42 foreign interface device 84 interface options internet free polling fax 27 services 2 G internal auditron setup 69 glossary 1 internal auditron setup glossary terms defined 2 DC420 76 gray scale copying copy 29 internet services 1 ground fault interrupter GFI assistance tab 14 20 document management group dial directory fax 40 fields 22 H interface options 2 hash button 24 job submission 4 help button 24 27 maintenance tab 13 high capacity feeder paperport 25 loading 10 problem solving 28 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide properties features 9 properties tab 8 public amp repositories 15 queue tab 6 scan to fax 27 scan to file 24 scan with local copy 27 services tab 4 standard features 2 status tab 7 template management 16 template operations 23 template pools 16 template services 17 template summary 16 interrupt button 24 interrupt button setup 14 ISDN digital line 67 italic typeface conventions 4 J jams clearance 3 job assembly copy 48 lighter darker setup 51 lighter darker fax 20 privatelighter darker server fax 55 line monitor setup 61 line use restriction setup 66 loading documents document feeder 2 loading long edge feed LEF paper 6 loading paper 2 loading paper in the bypass tray 6
294. start 4 sides scanned 9 speed dial 15 standard features embedded fax 7 store for polling 27 delete documents 29 free polling 27 print documents store 29 secure polling 28 dialling 10 51 store to mailbox 30 fax reports 35 telephone 13 options 35 transmission report 20 ISDN digital line 67 fax approvals and certification keypad 15 11 LAN fax features 62 fax communication setup 57 lighter darker 20 fax file management setup 55 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide vi fax mailbox 30 high capacity feeder HCF 10 fax mailboxes setup 53 high capacity feeder fax panel default setup 50 specifications 5 fax printing options setup 44 hints conventions 5 fax queue 63 I fax report options 35 ICES 003 10 fax report options setup 47 if file already exists setup 95 fax reports fax 35 if file already exists network fax setups 34 scanning 17 fax specifications 8 Illegal Copying 17 fax status options 5 image adjustment copy 22 fax terminal options setup 38 image adjustment network FCC Part 68 Compliance 11 scanning 7 FCC regulations image quality options copy 20 data coupler informationimage quality setup 28 11 image quality copy 20 send header requirementimage shift options copy 27 11 image shift copy 27 feature button 17 incoming fax options setup 63 files for polling setup 56 individual dial directory fax 37 finisher information sources 27 loading staples 12 information sources finisher automatic
295. supplied with the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 The Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass To ensure optimum print quality at all times clean the document glass and constant velocity transport glass monthly or more often if needed This helps avoid output with streaks smears and other marks that transfer from the glass area when scanning documents Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 3 Maintenance gt To clean the glass areas use a lint free cloth lightly dampened with water or Xerox Lens and Mirror Cleaner gt Clean the white tabs located on the under side of the Document Cover and in the Document Feeder to remove dry ink smudges and other marks The Control Panel and Touch Screen Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen and Control Panel free from dust and dirt To remove finger prints and smudges clean the control panel and touch screen with a soft lint free cloth lightly dampened with water The Document Feeder and Output Trays Use a cloth moistened with water to clean the Document Feeder output trays paper trays and the outside areas of the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Page 12 4 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Replacing the Copy Print Cartridge The Copy Print Cartridge is a customer replaceable unit This assembly holds the dry ink for the DC440 432 430 426 425 42
296. t Load large envelopes long edge feed with the envelope flap face down in the tray gt Side flap envelopes should be loaded with any folded edges to the right gt Place the envelopes in the tray with the opening of the envelope face down For DL wallet envelopes the flap should be to the left Loading the Envelope Tray NOTE Make sure that the paper tray guides are just touching the envelope stock loaded Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 10 9 Paper and other media The High Capacity Feeder optional The High Capacity Feeder is an option on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Although the High Capacity Feeder is designed to accept 16 110lb substance 16 110 paper it can hold 2 000 sheets of 20lb substance 20 8 1 2 x 11 paper NOTE To ensure maximum performance when loading stock of 32lbs or heavier it is recommended that the Heavyweight option is selected as the Type in the Tray Attributes screen Loading the High Capacity Feeder gt Use the handle on the front to pull open the High Capacity Feeder The elevator in the tray lowers gt The Tray Attributes window will be displayed on the touch screen gt Place the paper tightly against the right hand side of the tray gt Close the High Capacity Feeder The elevator rises and positions the paper for use gt Select Confirm in the Tray Attributes window NOTE If loading a d
297. t re dial and re send jobs are in order based on start time The DC440 432 430 425 can have up to two embedded fax lines available making it possible to have two active jobs at one time Any job currently being sent or received via a telephone line is considered active and is displayed on either Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 63 Page 4 64 Name Type Owner Status Pages the top line or top two lines depending on the number of fax lines available Scroll to see information about each fax job in the queue When sending a fax to multiple recipients broadcast the Fax Queue displays the number of the first recipient when the job is actively being sent to that recipient Then it displays the second number in place of the first number and so on as each number is dialed A status of Completed in the Fax Queue means the fax has been received the name or telephone number of the remote terminal that the fax is sent to or received from For network fax jobs this is the name of the job the type of job such as broadcast immediate send LAN fax send store for poll and so on the creator of the job For LAN fax jobs this is the name of the person submitting the job For fax send broadcast mailbox send and polling reservation jobs the owner is displayed as local information about the progress of an active or pending fax job such as sending receiving no active fax job scanning pen
298. t Copy Out Time for the DC440 432 430 425 Center Tray using the Document Feeder 6 9 seconds Center Tray using the Platen Glass 3 9 seconds Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 14 3 Specifications Page 14 4 Left Tray after the job is scanned Warm up Time Cold Start approximately 3 1 2 minutes DC440 432 430 425 Digital Copier 55 seconds DC426 420 Digital Copier 59 seconds Document Feeder Capacity 50 sheets Paper sizes 8 1 2 x5 1 2 LEF through 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weights 16 32lb substance 16 32 Mixed Sizes Yes when selected on the user interface and the lead edges have the same dimensions Size Sensing Yes Paper Supply Trays 1 2 3 amp 4 Capacity 500 sheets of 20lb substance 20 Paper Weights 16 24lb substance 16 24 Paper Sizes 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 LEF tray 1 only 8 1 2 x 11 SEF 8 1 2 x 11 LEF 11 x17 SEF Auto Size Sensing DC440 432 430 425 10 sizes from tray 1 8 sizes from trays 2 3 and 4 DC426 420 8 sizes from all 4 trays Simplex Duplex Feed from all 4 trays Media Type Bond Index Covers Labels Transparencies Drilled Standard Preprinted Recycled Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Bypass Tray Capacity 50 sheets of 20Ib substance 20 per tray Paper Weights 16 110lb substance 16 110 Paper Sizes 4 x 6 SEF to 11 x 17 SEF Auto Size Sensing 6 sizes programmable by t
299. t documents It requires less communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos this is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Original Type Text Auto Photo Fax Use this feature to identify the type of document being scanned F More E SR amp Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing ES use this setting for text line art and documents with large solid areas It produces sharp text images but might reduce the quality of halftone or photographic images This is the default setting use this setting for combinations of text and photos or text and graphics use this setting for photographs and images that have a continuous tone However it might reduce the sharpness of the text Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 49 Sides Scanned gt Select Sides Scanned to access the options available 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2nd side rotated 1 2 2 2 Page 4 50 This is used to specify whether the documents are single sided or double sided For double sided documents the image orientation can also be programmed Fax More Fax Features amp Sides Scanned 1 Sided Resolution Original Type Dialing text Auto Dialing Characters Phonebook Photo The following options are availa
300. t is delivered in the order the documents were placed in the Document Feeder Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 15 9 Glossary Page 15 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Index Numerics authentication 14 2 up copy 36 authentication mode e mail 14 authentication mode network about this guide 1 scanning 22 access button 24 authentication mode server fax access fax communication 58 setup 58 auto answer setup 63 Auto Center Image access rights setup 86 account information machine Shift Copy 27 status 22 auto clear setup 12 account setup DC420 77 auto tray switching 11 account setups 70 automatic stapling finisher 12 account summary 74 B activity report setup 47 basic image quality options e add accounts setup 78 mail 9 add modify accounts setup 71 basic image quality options added features copy 21 network scaning 9 added features scan 7 basic image quality e mail 9 additional setups 15 basic image quality network localization 14 scanning 9 administrator privileges PIN batch send setup 62 setup 90 booklet creation copy 44 annotation options copy 39 border erase setup 32 annotation copy 38 bound originals options copy answer mode fax 36 26 area edit options copy 32 bound originals copy 25 assistance tab internetbracket text typeface services 14 conventions 4 asterisk button 24 broadcast amp multi poll reports auditron setup 48 foreign inter
301. ten Cushion located on the under side of the Platen Cover The touch screen displays a message that gt Select Original Size on the touch screen it can t sense the size of the and enter the size document Page 13 4 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Symptom Recommendation Close lower left door message gt Slide the Finisher High Capacity Feeder away from the printer gt Open the lower left door and then close it Ensure the door is latched securely in place before sliding the Finisher High Capacity Feeder back The machine does not display the High Capacity Feeder or one of the paper trays in the Paper Supply selections gt Check to see if any paper trays are open If a tray is ajar the machine cannot sense its connection gt Open and close each paper tray and the High Capacity Feeder power OFF the machine and then power ON the machine The touch screen does not display the Finisher Stapler option gt Slide the Finisher into its correct position The Document Centre configures itself when additional options are attached The machine does not accept documents into memory gt Check with the Key Operator about the available memory capacity If the memory is almost full print and delete unnecessary files The machine displays a memory full error message gt Check with the Key Operator about available memory gt Div
302. ter the text that is to be printed on to the cover page Options use to identify specific dialing and sending requirements Refer to Print on page 8 1 for more information about the print features NOTE Refer to the CentreWare customer documentation for further information on the LAN Fax features Page 4 62 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Managing Fax Jobs Fax Managing the Fax queues consists of maintaining each job Quick Pathway within the queue Job management is performed on each Select Job Status on ludes organizing advancing and intitig jobs based on the control panel g 9 g Hl Sal Binet their characteristics SSES The Fax Queue and the Completed Fax Jobs Queue will only Select Fax Queue or be available in Job Status after Fax has been enabled Completed Fax Jobs Queue NOTE If Server Fax is enabled then received faxes will only appear in the Print Queue Fax Queue The Fax Queue button will only be displayed if Fax is available rome te Jone mr This queue maintains all fax jobs that are scanned and ready to be transmitted including LAN fax and outgoing Server Fax jobs The Fax Queue also contains fax scan jobs for delayed fax jobs including jobs sent to a mailbox and polling reservation The Fax Queue consists of jobs that are active or waiting to be active if the queue is full Jobs are managed in the order they were submitted Delayed star
303. tes uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interferences at their own expense Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user s authority to operate this equipment WARNING Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations ICES 003 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Page 1 10 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide FCC Part 68 Send Header Requirements Federal Communications Commission FCC regulations require all persons within the United States who send any message via a facsimile machine to include an identifying message in the transmission The message must clearly contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity business or individual sending the message This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name features required for the FCC regulation To satisfy the FCC regulation the telephone number and name must be included with the printed document To comply with the FCC rules carefully read and f
304. that Ju 0 Je JL EZ appears in the Change button will vary depending on the njen jenjen en n n an e network EE EC HES ER E E J fee Js The example shown refers to a DNS Domain gt Select Change DNS Domain gt Select the required network environment gt Select Enter to continue fa ENG MC BGREAL COM gt Complete login to User Name and Password Jess BGREAL COM _ sassu BGREAL COM If required please contact the System Administrator for further assistance Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 17 E mail Logging Off gt Select Access C xs Network A warning message will be Scanning displayed You have selected to Log Off from the gt Select OK Authentication Service Re a Select OK to confirm Select Cancel to remain Authenticated NOTE If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the Auditron at the same time as Authentication the user will be logged off the other service at the same time as logging off from Authentication Page 7 18 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Managing Scan Jobs Quick Pathway Select Job Status on the control panel Select Other Queues Select Scan Queue or Completed Scan Jobs Queue Scan Queue Managing the Scan queues consists of maintaining each job within the queue Job management is performed on each individual job contained within the queue
305. the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide for further information Auditron Administrator Tools The Internal Auditron Job Based Accounting DC 440 432 430 425 Foreign Interface Device If a PIN is entered that has been assigned Auditron Administrator access rights on the DC440 432 430 425 or Owner access rights on the DC 426 420 the user can set up or change the Auditron settings is a feature which records machine usage by account and restricts usage and or access Refer to Internal Auditron DC440 432 430 425 on page 11 69 or Internal Auditron DC 426 420 on page 11 76 for further information refers to an external device available on network configured machines only An external accounting system server is used to store account data Refer to Job Based Accounting optional DC 440 432 430 425 on page 11 82 for further information refers to an external control device such as a coin operated device a bill acceptor a card reader or a network controlled tracking system installed on the system Refer to Foreign Interface Device on page 11 84 for further information Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 3 Owner Tools Access Rights Changing the Settings Page 11 4 If a PIN is entered that has been assigned Owner access rights the user can set up or change the allocation of Key Operator System Administrator Auditr
306. the default tray The Paper Supply button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Paper Tray 4 In Machine Setups Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax jobs if the disabled tray is the default tray The Paper Supply button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 23 Setups Disabled Component Service Feature Disabled Feature Result Page 11 24 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Copy Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Enter Key Operator PIN see NOTE Select Copy Setups Refer to the following pages for the procedures for Copy Setups which includes programming the default settings for the following features Reduce Enlarge page 11 26 Image Quality page 11 28 Output page 11 29 Sides Imaged page 11 29 Expert Image Quality page 11 31 Margin Shift DC440 432 430 425 page 11 31 Erase DC 440 432 430 425 page 11 32 NOTE These changes can only be made when a PIN Personal Identification Number which has been assigned Key Operator access rights is entered The default password is 22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been assigned Access the Copy Setups gt Select Access on the Control Panel A pop up window will be displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select on the Control Panel and use th
307. the dialing used to delete a used to enter a pause in a telephone number when transmitting a fax Off Sleep mode Page 2 24 numeric value or the last digit entered Also replaces the current value with a default value character to designate a group dial number also used when entering a password Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Job Interrupt Interrupt on Set Boundary Interrupt on Page Boundary gt Select Job Interrupt The indicator light will be lit NOTE The Document Centre identifies a convenient point to interrupt the current job gt Program the job gt Select Start The interrupt job will be completed gt Select Job Interrupt and follow the screen messages to continue the interrupted job Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Job Interrupt is used to temporarily suspend the current copying printing to allow an urgent copy job to be completed When using job interrupt only a limited range of features will be available for programming The System Administrator can set up Job Interrupt as follows the machine will finish printing the current set the machine will finish printing the current page Job Status BS Fa D Machine Status E c Job Interrupt button NOTE Interrupt jobs cannot be promoted released or deleted in the Print Queue Page 2 25 Product Overview Auditron Access
308. the productivity features available in the Job Assembly tab to program a job For more information about the features available refer to the following Build Job page 3 48 Stored Jobs page 3 50 j Ew Cory Image Output d Job Adjustment Format Assembly Build Job Stored Jobs off _ E si Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page For example if a set of documents consists of some pages with text and some with photos you can select appropriate settings to be applied to individual pages or sections of a complete job By default Build Job is set to Off HINT To save time use the Build Job Screen instead of the control panel to program each page Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt v Split the documents into sections for individual programming Select Build Job and then Press Save to continue programming job or On jo Press Start to scan in first segment Programme the job requirements for the first section of the job Load only the first section in to the document feeder or place the document on the glass Select Start NOTE If more than a quantity of 1 has been selected the machine depending on the features programmed will copy 1 set of each section The remaining sets will be copied at the end of the job When the first section has finished scanning remove the originals From the Build Job screen
309. tication has been enabled it will be enabled for all three services The following steps may vary depending on the authentication mode set up by the System Administrator Please contact the System Administrator for further assistance Login Guest Access A login passcode is required gt Using the control panel keypad enter your passcode Network Image Output gt Select Enter ga Guest Access Provide a login passcode Type passcode using the keypad to the right then select Enter SS Enter Page 6 22 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Login Network Authenticated Access A login name and password are required gt Select Enter Epe Network Image Output All Scanning Adjustment Format Services Network Authenticated Access Select the Enter button to type your login name and password Q Enter gt Using the keyboard enter the network user name A Aa Change More DNS Domain Characters Cancan NOTE Select More User Name Vicky Characters required od JO Oooo gt Select Enter gt Enter the network password NOTE Select More Characters if required Password RESTE o S a ee LOL gt Select Enter JAJAJAA ee A pop up message will be DEEE IE 00e displayed The machine is now processing the log in request Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guid
310. tion of this machine to an unauthorized jack You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Use the standard line cord with modular plugs provided with the installation kit to connect it An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant Do not connect this machine to a party or coin operated phone line Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox representative or an authorized Xerox service agency This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period If unauthorized repair is performed the remainder of the warranty period is null and void If you find the telephone line is damaged or the telephone company notifies you that your machine is causing damage disconnect the machine from the telephone line and call for service Do not reconnect the machine until necessary repairs are made The telephone company will where practical notify you when they need to temporarily disconnect service However if action is reasonable and necessary but prior notice is not practical they may still temporarily disconnect your service In such cases they must gt Immediately notify you of their temporary action gt Reconnect service when the source of damage is removed gt Inform you of your ri
311. tion required Font Listing displays a listing of PCL and PostScript fonts Print Test Page enables a test page to be printed at the machine Reports displays a list of the reports that are available for printing Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 13 Internet Services Assistance Tab Page 9 14 Use Assistance to access the internet links for software browser and Xerox support gt Select Assistance gt Select the option required to access the relevant information NOTE The Customer Support and Service numbers entered here will also be displayed on the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Scanning with Internet Services This section explains the components functions and procedures for Network Scanning or Scan to File Refer to the Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 System Administration Guide Chapter 6 of this User Guide and the CentreWare documentation for more information Public and Private Repositories Repositories are directories or filing destinations set up on a server where files and saved documents created by scanning are held Documents can be scanned to either a public or private repository Public repositories are validated by Internet Services when defined by the System Administrator as a scanning destination These repositories are set up on the Properties Services Stored Templates Repository Setup
312. to copy and or manipulate non standard size documents from the Document Feeder and Document Glass Use the following steps to program this feature on the DC440 432 430 425 NOTE This feature is known as Original Input on the DC426 420 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Place a document on the document glass and select the features required gt Select Original Size gt Select the option required Auto Original Size Mixed Size vate cme 5 5 Auto Original Size Mixed Size Original Size DC440 432 430 425 Original Input DC426 420 Options automatically determines the size of the document being copied and selects a paper supply source of the same size The machine cannot sense the size of non standard documents indicates the document size or the size you want the Document Centre to scan if the document is a non standard size Choose from the preset sizes listed or using the scroll arrows enter the X and Y values This feature can be used with the Document Feeder or the Document Glass NOTE The paper tray sensors can detect only the size of the paper loaded They cannot detect paper attributes such as transparencies color stock or drilled stock The attributes must be selected use this option to feed documents of different sizes through the document feeder To produce size for size or reduced enlarged copies To enable this feature documents mu
313. tock to be automatically inserted within a set Up to 10 inserts can be added per copy set When using the DC440 432 430 425 two insert trays are available for programming The paper tray s selected must match in size and orientation with the paper tray being used for the main body of the job NOTE 1 gt 2 and 2 gt 1 and Platen configurations cannot be used with Inserts Off First Insert Tray LJ Tray 1 Second Insert Tray CH Tray 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Working from the beginning of the document set count through to the first insert A First Insert Tray el Tray 1 Second Insert Tray RE gt Using the arrow buttons scroll through to the required page number NOTE If the insert is to be First Insert Tray Pages 3 Page Number a J Add Insert J Delete Last Insert CSC ser Insert Tra Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 High Capacity Feeder blank add a blank sheet to the document set For printed inserts enter the page number of the page as it appears in the documents gt Select Add Insert The insert programmed will appear in the review window To correct an error select Delete Last Insert gt If necessary select the paper tray in the Insert Tray list that the insert stock is to be fed from NOTE When using both insert trays switch between the nsert Tray buttons to enter the insert number and app
314. ts Head to Toe the output will be rotated 180 NOTE nserts can not be programmed with 1 2 Bound Originals and Build Job are not available with 1 2 selected when using the document glass Tabbed stock envelopes and transparencies will not feed through the Duplex Module In addition to 100 size for size copies reduced or enlarged copies can be produced by selecting one of the Reduce Enlarge options If the media loaded is the same size as the documents but does not match the orientation the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 can rotate the image so that it fits correctly on to the paper Rotation will only occur when Auto Reduce Enlarge or Auto Paper Supply but not both is selected Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Auto or one of the presets options 100 Auto Presets Other T EN Copy Added SES All 89 Sides Image Imaged Quality Collated J 1 gt 1 Sided J 100 J Auto J Text J Uncollated 1 gt 2 Sided J Auto J 82x10 J Auto J Stapled j 2 gt 2 Sided J 84 5 gt BY 14 J 6 x ND J Photo J 2 gt 1 Sided J BY4xN gt 1x17 J Nx 17 J Iesse es CA D Other J Other J Other J Kb P Output Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge options size for size copies automatically reduces enlarges a document to fit on the paper size selected NOTE When Auto Reduce Enlarge is selected the machine automatically selects 8 1 2
315. ts have been scanned press End Build Job button Scanning Size Q Auto Sides Scanned CH 1 Sided Resolution Fine Original Type C Text Page 4 25 Poll Remote Fax Polling Delayed polling DTMF Mailbox Polling gt Select Poll Remote Fax gt Select On and Save gt On the first Fax screen enter the number of the remote fax machine gt Select Start Page 4 26 NOTE Build Job cannot be used with Poll Remote Fax or if the Telephone button has been selected Also nterrupt Clear All Access Features Job Status and Machine Status will not be available when Build Job is in use Polling means retrieving a document from a remote machine The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 offers several types of polling Each method prompts specific selections If the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 does not connect with the remote machine when polling it redials the number However if it does connect and then the transmission fails it does not redial the number If this happens start the job again After the telephone connection is made the polled fax job appears in the Fax Job Queue in Job Status retrieving a document from a remote fax machine retrieving a document at a programmed time Only one delayed polling job is allowed at one time retrieving a document from a mailbox in a remote machine If the remote fax is a DC440 432 430 426 425 420 documents can be stored in a mailbox for polling Off On
316. tups Download All Accounts downloads Auditron information to a PC However the download process requires additional external hardware in order to operate Contact the Xerox Sales representative for further information gt To download account information select Download All Accounts A message will appear confirming that the download ownload complete is in progress Press close to return to account summary screen gt Oncompletion a confirmation message will be displayed gt Select Close Job Completion Setup DC426 420 This feature sets machine behavior when the user s account limit has been reached When the limit is reached the machine will either stop the current job immediately or let the job finish and go over the limit gt Access Auditron Setups gt Select Internal Auditron Page 11 80 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Select Job Completion Setup ee a co se gt Make selections as required FORCE TRE see below for a description of each On CH Terminate Job if set to On the machine will stop the job as soon as the account limit has been reached any pages committed to print will be allowed to print Delete Pending Jobs if set to On when an account limit is reached all pending jobs assigned to this account will be deleted gt To download account information select Download All Accounts A message will
317. u ment dimensions without cropping Normal enables the Scale Pre serving Aspect Ratio field which enables reduction or enlargement of an image proportionately Type the percent 50 200 required to reduce or enlarge the image Custom enables the Scale With out Preserving Aspect Ratio field which enables reduction or enlarge ment of an image disproportion ately Type the percent 50 200 you wish to reduce or enlarge the image Edge Border Erase Choose this setting to erase the spots punch holes staple marks folds or any other dark lines which may appear around the edge of an original document You can erase marks which appear in the outer 0 to 15 mm of the page Selections are Off no marks will be erased Border Erase enables you to erase equal amounts of area on each side of a page Edge Erase enables you to erase disproportionate areas on each side of a page Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 21 Internet Services Page 9 22 Field Name Control Panel Prompt Default Value Document Management Fields The Document Management Fields feature allows users to include variable programmable data with a job when it is being scanned to a repository The scanned job will be stored with this information in the Job Log The Job Log can then be accessed by third party software and the Document Management information retrieved with the scanned file
318. uch screen or any button on the control panel is touched the document feeder is loaded a paper tray opened a job is submitted to the print Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 2 11 Product Overview queue fax receive or network print or a fax or print job arrives in the print queue The machine responds within one second and all the features are available within 50 seconds NOTE The machine will not exit Power Save Auto Off Sleep mode if a fax job arrives and the fax enabled trays are empty The job will be held in memory until either the control panel is touched or paper is loaded The factory default setting of 60 minutes is customer changeable within the range of 5 to 240 minutes depending on work pattern Changing the Default Time Settings gt Select Access 7 on the control panel Page 2 12 m OOC Job Status 3 E Fr i A S DAE Machine Statu mm C O C C g d ny a 7 it An Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide gt Enter the password using the keypad and select Enter Zeite NOTE User access to Setups Output Quality is password protected Please fs eran hap ot Zorte D contact the Key Operator or L Gem Ss refer to Zus on page 11 1 ES coo or assistance A P gt Select Machine Setups Machine Setups Print Setups CH Copy Setups C Network Scanning
319. uide Output Quality Various situations can affect the quality of the output Check the following conditions to ensure optimum copy performance If you still cannot resolve the problem contact the Key Operator Do not locate the DC 440 432 430 426 425 420 in direct sunlight or near a radiator Avoid sudden changes in the DC 440 432 430 426 425 420 s environment When a change occurs allow the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 at least two hours to adjust its settings to the new environment depending on the severity of the change Follow regular maintenance schedules for cleaning areas such as the Document Glass CVT and output trays Refer to Maintenance on page 12 1 Always set the media size sensor tab at the rear of the paper tray to the size of the media in the tray Otherwise you might experience jams or dry ink residue on the output Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 13 19 Problem Solving Call for Service procedure If the difficulty persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center Xerox Welcome Center Telephone Number The telephone number of the Xerox Welcome Center is provided at the time of product installation For convenience and future reference please record the telephone number in the space below Canada English French and local Toronto 800 939 3769 United States 800 821 2797 Page 13 20 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide 14 Specifications
320. uire maintenance tasks to be carried out Information contained in this chapter will assist in these tasks Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 12 1 Maintenance Ordering Supplies A variety of supplies such as the Copy Print Cartridge cleaning solutions editing markers and staples are available for the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 To obtain supplies contact the local Xerox office giving the company name the product number and it s serial number Use the space below to record the telephone number Supplies Telephone Number Page 12 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Cleaning the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Proper maintenance is important for the smooth operation of any equipment CAUTION When cleaning the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 do notuse organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners Do not pour fluids directly onto any area Avoid supplies that are not specifically listed as approved in this documentation they can cause poor performance and create a dangerous condition Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children WARNING Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation
321. ument Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 6 11 Network Scanning Stored Image Settings gt Select Stored Image Settings gt Select the options required gt Select Save Page 6 12 Resolution Stored Image Size Output Image Format DC440 432 430 425 Defines the image output requirements CES o Resolution DW 400 x 400 dpi DW 200 x 200 dpi DW ee o 300 x 300 dpi LJ 100 x 200 dpi ize Output Image S DW Gr DW 600 x 600 dpi Stored Image Settings Options defines the resolution at which the original will be scanned and the image stored Select from 600 x 600 dpi 400 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 200 dpi or 100 x 200 dpi NOTE The greater the resolution selected the larger the size of the stored image file This will result in more time being required to complete the scan job defines the size of the stored image file Same as Original produces an image size that matches the size of the original document Auto automatically adjust the image size based on the document size and specified magnification setting Custom defines the size of the stored image using the X and Y axis buttons sets the format for the scanned image files to Tiff Multipage Tiff or PDF files NOTE Selecting TIFF will result in one image file being created for each original side scanned Selecting Multipage Tiff or PDF will result in one image file being created for all document sides scanned Xerox Docu
322. uto and Manual the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 automatically answers the telephone The Key Operator can set the Auto Answer delay between 0 and 15 seconds This depends on the way the machine is used The delay gives recipients an opportunity to answer the telephone After the programmed time delay or immediately if it is set to 0 the machine automatically answers the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 Will not automatically answer On answering the telephone and if a fax tone is heard select Receive and Start to switch from the telephone to fax Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Dial Directory Setup The DC440 432 430 426 425 420 enables programming of numbers for individuals and groups Begin by programming individual numbers Then combine numbers that are to be included in a group Individual Use this feature to enter numbers in to the Dial Directory gt Select More Features gt Select Reports amp Setups gt Select Dial Directory Setup Directory Number 001 200 FER A gt Select Individual 004 gt Select a blank location in Dial Directory gt Select Next gt Using the keypad on the control panel enter the fax telephone number for the individual Directory No 001 gt Select Next 22323 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 37 Fax gt Use the soft keypad to
323. utput options and to compress Bitmaps which saves memory and enables faster printing prints a test page use to send print to a new port or a new network path update or change print drivers and select time out settings enables selection of Capture Print Port Form and Job for example banner copies Use to map or remove the mapping to the network drive change page dimensions and select a banner page number of copies etc Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Tower Mailbox Print If the Tower Mailbox is fitted print jobs can be sent to a mailbox bin Mailboxes are normally assigned by the System Administrator The mailbox contains 10 bins NE AV NN a 4 a ee RW PE a ry On the DC440 432 430 425 each bin can accommodate 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed and 11 x 17 short edge feed paper sizes and can hold approximately 100 sheets of 20lb substance 20 On the DC426 420 each bin can accommodated 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 long edge feed and 11 x 17 short edge feed paper sizes and can hold approximately 70 sheets of 20lb substance 20 Each bin contains a Bin Full sensor that indicates when the bin is full and a message will appear on the workstation screen Output is delivered face down in the bins NOTE Envelopes should be fed to the center tray only Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guid
324. vailable to the machine as a list of template names The default template default is always present on the machine and is displayed at the top of the template list The Network Scanning screen also displays a Summary of the setups stored within the selected template for example information on the filing location of the scanned image file For more information about the other features available refer to the following Image Adjustment page 6 7 Output Formats page 6 14 Authentication Mode page 6 22 NOTE The Scan to Email option is not available on the DC426 420 The following screen will only be displayed on the DC440 432 430 425 Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Directory Document Folder Name Image Quality Original Size Sides Imaged Scan Resolution Scan Media Scan to Scan to Scan to Email File Fax Network Image Output Adjustment Format E Scanning Je List A ee DW Refresh Ej D Template Scan Resolution 300 x 300 dpi Summary Box Features the directory path where the file being scanned will be stored the name of the folder in which the image will be stored any adjustments required for specific types of originals Text Photo Auto the size of the original document selects 1 or 2 sided scanning 600 x 600 dpi DC 440 430 432 400 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 200 dpi or 100 x 200 dpi Xerox Document Centr
325. x Fax When the More Fax Features tab is selected the following features will be available Lighter Darker page 4 55 Original Input Size page 4 56 Delayed Start page 4 57 NOTE If Fax is the default screen this tab will be called Added Features On selection it will change to More Fax Features More Fax All Features Services 7 Lighter Darker Delayed Start C Normal C Off Original Input Size E Auto Adjusts the image quality of the document being scanned Lighter Normal Darker a y Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 4 55 Original Input Size gt Select Original Size gt Select the option required gt Select Save Page 4 56 Auto Custom Standard Allows a user to manually select the size of the document when the machine is unable to detect the document size for example when a document has a black border Auto Size Detection is the default setting NOTE Auto Size Detection works with both the document feeder and the document glass Standard and Custom sizes work with the platen glass only A message will only be displayed when the machine has detected the document size Original Size Options accepts the machine s automatic size sensing The size detected will be matched to a standard size paper allows a non standard paper size to be defined To enter a value use the scroll bars or select the X o
326. x Server use to select the output tray for faxes printed by the Fax Server offers the Netware or TCP IP network options Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Embedded Fax Fax Terminal Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Enter the Key Operator PIN Select Fax Setups Select Fax Terminal Setups Refer to the following pages for the procedures for changing the default Embedded Fax features Embedded Fax Setups is divided into two areas Fax Terminal Setups to set and change the defaults for the available fax options such as paper size and type resolution and mailbox options Fax Communication Setups to set options that affect incoming and outgoing fax documents such as re dialing and preventing the receipt of junk fax documents This section contains the procedures for the following Fax Terminal Setups Fax Terminal Setups page 11 37 Fax Printing Options page 11 44 Fax Report Options page 11 47 Fax Panel Defaults page 11 50 Fax Mailboxes page 11 53 Fax File Management page 11 55 C Fax Terminal Options Fax Printing Options Q Fax Report Options C Fax Panel Defaults C Fax Mailboxes Fax File Management Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 37 Setups Access Fax Terminal Setups gt Select Fax Terminal Options gt Select any button to change the setting a description of each follows
327. xt or Secure If Secure is selected the characters entered will be displayed as used by the System Administrator to enter a default user number which can be used by users Users may still edit the ID as normal but must delete the entry before entering another number used by the System Administrator to enter a default account number which can be used by users Users may still edit the ID as normal but must delete the entry before entering another number sets the machine to either Disable Accounting or Declare Fault when an account is full This will normally occur when the machine has logged 2000 jobs and has not been polled by the EAS server to send the Job Log NOTE Job Interrupt is available when this feature is enabled Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 83 Setups Quick Pathway Select Access Control Panel Select button on the Control Panel Enter Auditron Administrator PIN see NOTE Select Auditron Setups Select External Control Device onthe Off Per Page Control Page 11 84 Foreign Interface Device A Foreign Interface Device might be a coin operated device a bill acceptor a card reader or a network controlled tracking system installed on the system The device must initially be enabled by the Xerox representative This device controls Copier print services only a gt Access Auditron Setups Refer to Access Auditron Setups on page 11
328. xtension PDF files are formatted with the PDF file extension Erases unwanted marks from the edges of a scanned document is cas ser B IC Border Erase D Edge Erase Erase Options op Bottom Left Right orf O 2in O 2in 2i 2i 00 00 m Border Erase a 0 Edge Erase y j y scanning is edge to edge E E erases equal amounts 0 2 in from the top bottom and both sides of the document erases amounts 0 2 in specified from the top bottom and both sides independent of each other Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Output Format Quick Pathway Select Features on the control panel Select E mail Select Output Format Reply to gt Select Reply to gt Enter the e mail address using the keypad on the touch screen gt Select Enter Select this tab to enter additional programming for the following E mail Image Output Adjustment Format Be Used to enter a reply to e mail address or to search a configured address book NOTE This feature can also be accessed from the Reply to button on the From details screen Change A More Reply to f JC FE YP OT jE eu FT YS QQ WIWIGIGICICIOI Ce ES UE E WE SS E HES Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 7 13 E mail Authentication Mode E mail Authentication i
329. y w el Y Setups Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 11 33 Setups Fax Setups Quick Pathway Select Access onthe Control Panel Enter Key Operator PIN see NOTE below Select Fax Setups Select the option required Access the Fax Setups gt Select Access lt lt on the Control Panel A pop up window will be displayed on the Touch Screen gt Select on the Control Panel and use the number keypad to enter a Key Operator PIN see NOTE opposite gt Select Enter in the pop up window Page 11 34 On the DC440 432 430 425 both Server Fax and Embedded Fax can be installed on the Document Centre but only one service can be enabled at any one time If both are installed they must be configured separately NOTE Which ever option has been enabled the Fax tab will retain the same name NOTE Only Embedded Fax can be installed on the DC426 420 For more information about Embedded Fax Setups please refer to Embedded Fax Setups page 11 37 aye Copy Output Please enter your password Collated using the keypad to your right Uncollated poses CS eee en CRT ES SE EE NOTE These changes can only be made when a PIN Personal Identification Number which has been assigned Key Operator access rights is entered The default password is 22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been assigned
330. y and Copy Setups Output Uncollated Left Tray The machine will not print Copy jobs if the Finisheris disabled and the default outputis the Left Tray The Output button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Finisher and Stapler In Copy Setups Output Stapled The machine will not print Copy jobs if Stapled is disabled and also is the default output The Output button will not be displayed on the Copy screen Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with Foreign Interface Device The Copy feature is disabled Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with Foreign Interface Device and Internal Auditron Control The Copy feature is enabled only for Internal Auditron Control Foreign Interface Device In Setups Auditron Setups External Control Device Per Page Control or Monitor with or without limits For Copy with a Foreign Interface Device the machine will not copy if Foreign Interface Device is disabled and External Control Device is selected For Copy with Foreign Interface Device and Internal Auditron Control Copy is enabled only for Internal Auditron Control Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with Foreign Interface Device The Copy feature is disabled High Capacity Feeder Copy High Capacity Tray High Capacity Feeder The High Capacity Feeder The machine will not print Copy or Fax jobs if the disabled tray is the default tray
331. y the System Administrator prior to use After installation some of the Internet Services features will have restricted access Contact the System Administrator for further assistance if required Xerox Document Centre 440 432 430 426 425 420 User Guide Page 9 1 Internet Services Standard Features Internet Services Interface Options By entering the IP Address of the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 as the URL Universal Resource Locator in the Browser direct access to the DC440 432 430 426 425 420 is available NOTE Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 x or later or Netscape Navigator 4 x or later should be used Other browsers may work but could produce unexpected results When accessed the Home Page for the Web UI displays with the following options gt Services gt Queue gt Status gt Properties gt Maintenance gt Assistance The following table describes the various programming options available when using Internet Services Function Action Pages Displays the available features Frames Normally a left or right frame The left frame contains the Document Centre status information On some pages information in the left frame is shown in a tree or directory folder format Selecting an icon or name will expand the tree and or display further informa tion in the right frame Feature pages Divided into a left and right frame Page 9 2 Xerox Document Centre 440 432

Motorola 6802928J21 Cell Phone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents